Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Revit Architecture 2009 User's Guide PDF
Revit Architecture 2009 User's Guide PDF
Metric Tutorials
240A1-050000-PM04A
April 2008
2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not
be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC,
AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface,
Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk
Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine,
Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification,
Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's
Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World
(design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the
Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT,
Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder,
Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk
Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit,
Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction,
Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP,
Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,
Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright 2002 Autodesk, Inc.
Flash is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
International CorrectSpell Spelling Correction System 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield 3.0. Copyright 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
PANTONE Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards.
Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another
disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
RAL DESIGN RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut fr Gtesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL
German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin.
Typefaces from the Bitstream typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust 1996. All rights reserved.
Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer.
WindowBlinds: DirectSkin OCX Stardock
AnswerWorks 4.0 ; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved.
The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for
Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and
used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).
Portions of this computer program are copyright 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No.
5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending.
Portions of this computer program are Copyright ; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc.
OSTN97 Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved.
OSTN02 Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved.
OSGM02 Crown copyright 2002, Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002.
FME Objects Engine 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.
ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights
reserved.
RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.
Portions relating to JPEG Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Portions relating to TIFF Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff
portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties, including,
but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the
copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential
damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption)
however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in
any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7
Copyright 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell
this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this
permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics
may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and
Silicon Graphics.
Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the Software), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and
to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this
permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
Government Use
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
Contents
Getting
Chapter 1
Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Chapter 2
Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . .
Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data .
Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture .
Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . .
Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 27
. 28
. 31
. 38
. 41
. 42
. 47
. 51
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 58
. 60
. 64
. 72
. 77
. 82
. 85
Chapter 5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 155
. 155
. 159
. 166
. 172
. 175
. 176
. 179
. 182
. 184
. 187
. 192
. 192
. 196
. 201
. 202
Chapter 6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 207
. 207
. 213
. 217
. 220
. 221
. 226
. 228
. 230
. 232
. 238
. 246
. 249
. 249
. 251
. 254
. 258
. 258
. 260
. 260
vi | Contents
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions .
Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 270
. 270
. 279
. 281
. 286
. 289
. 290
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 297
. 298
. 304
. 308
. 310
. 312
. 314
. 319
. 320
. 321
. 321
. 323
Chapter 9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . .
Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . .
Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Line-based Detail Components .
Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . .
Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . .
Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . .
Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . .
Chapter 8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 339
. 339
. 345
. 345
. 347
. 347
. 351
. 356
. 356
. 358
. 360
. 361
. 367
. 368
. 368
. 369
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 391
. 392
. 399
. 403
. 407
. 411
. 412
. 415
Contents | vii
Chapter 11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 419
. 424
. 425
. 428
. 430
Chapter 12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 431
. 432
. 433
. 435
. 437
. 438
. 439
. 440
. 440
. 443
. 444
. 444
. 447
. 447
. 448
. 454
. 454
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 458
. 459
. 460
. 462
. 466
. 467
. 469
. 471
. 472
. 476
. 478
. 481
. 484
. 491
. 492
. 499
. 503
viii | Contents
Chapter 15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 539
. 539
. 541
. 544
. 548
. 548
. 550
. 552
Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint .
Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Area
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 557
. 557
. 562
. 565
. 567
. 571
. 572
. 574
. 576
. 578
. 586
. 587
. 588
. 590
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Chapter 17
Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . .
Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .
Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 603
. 604
. 610
. 611
. 616
. 616
. 618
. 621
. 624
. 624
. 627
. 628
. 631
. 634
. 638
. 640
. 644
. 649
Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups .
Creating and Placing a Group . . . .
Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . .
Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . .
Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 653
. 653
. 661
. 665
. 668
. 668
Contents | ix
Chapter 19
Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings .
Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . .
Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . .
Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . .
Chapter 20
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 677
. 678
. 684
. 689
. 690
. 698
. 703
. 706
. 710
. 713
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 717
. 718
. 718
. 722
. 726
. 729
. 734
Chapter 22
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 739
. 740
. 750
. 757
Chapter 23
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 772
. 772
. 781
. 784
. 786
. 789
. 789
. 791
. 795
. 796
. 797
x | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 807
. 808
. 811
. 811
. 815
. 817
. 820
. 825
. 827
. 828
. 831
. 831
. 832
. 837
. 839
. 842
. 843
. 845
Contents | xi
xii
Getting Started
Introduction
This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts
of the product, including:
The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a
title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson.
NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit
Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu Documents on the Web in
Revit Architecture.
Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric
units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.
Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix.
Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.
NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD
manager for more information.
IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training
files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the
tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.
4 | Chapter 1 Introduction
For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file.
You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note
where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.
For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.
10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates.
11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.
Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential.
Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building
type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as
necessary.
12 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open.
13 Click OK.
The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you
move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition.
Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed,
the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a
proportional characteristic.
The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the
floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.
6 | Chapter 1 Introduction
When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change
and reflects that change to any affected elements.
Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the
capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building
changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that
is unimportant to your design.
Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the
model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements.
Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum
elements.
View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or
document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.
Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs
are hosts.
Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows,
doors, and cabinets are model components.
Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For
example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements.
Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include
detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.
This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created
and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric
elements in Revit Architecture.
In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The
context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established
with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what
you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning
2 walls, for example.
Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design.
Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories, families, and types.
8 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For
example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include
tags and text notes.
Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of
parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family
may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of propertiestheir names and meaningis
the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that
compose the family come in different sizes and materials.
Families are either component families or system families:
Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine
the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.
System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for
loading or creating as separate files.
Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.
You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.
For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different
types of walls with different compositions.
Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block
or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions.
Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific
locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).
(New).
By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition,
the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view.
TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is
based.
10 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Many of the commands have shortcut keys, which are listed on the menu. For example, the
shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. While working in the drawing area, you type the required
key combination to perform the command.
Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and
right-click. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands, depending on the function
you are performing and what is currently selected.
The Toolbar
4 Click Window menu Toolbar.
There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. The toolbar
buttons represent common commands. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn
the text labels on or off using the Window Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to
resize and move each toolbar.
The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. When you select the Door tool, the Type
Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. The list of elements in the Type Selector
is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the
respective category.
You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. For
example, when you add a door, the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door
type that will be added to the building model.
12 | Chapter 1 Introduction
You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the
building model. In the drawing area, you can select any element and then change its type
using the Type Selector.
The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector.
There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control
which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.
11 Click OK.
Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar.
Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components
Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for
construction documents
Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans
Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans
To access the commands in a tab, click the tab in the Design Bar. The respective commands
display on the Design Bar.
TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the
tab from the shortcut menu.
14 | Chapter 1 Introduction
You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families,
and groups of your current project:
Right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups.
The browser is organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors,
walls, windows), and group name. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or
next to the name.
You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add
a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet.
The browser is dockable, so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar
to a new location.
13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.
In the bottom left corner of the window, the status bar provides information regarding what
you should do next. In this case, it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point."
TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.
16 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the status bar, notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West.
20 Press TAB, and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol,
Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5.
When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view, you can use the
status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element.
Revit Architecture 2009 Help
21 Click Help menu Revit Architecture 2009 Help.
Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. You can use this tri-pane,
HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. There are
several tools that help you find information. You can select a topic on the Contents tab, find a
keyword on the Index tab, search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab, or save
commonly used pages on the Favorites tab.
In addition, context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. You can
access context-sensitive help in the following ways:
Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Click the Help button, and the topic specific
to the dialog opens. If no Help button displays, press F1 for context-sensitive help.
Tooltips: To see tooltips, rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays.
TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu Options.
18 | Chapter 1 Introduction
NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command.
6 Click Zoom To Fit.
The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window.
7 Click in the drawing area, and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.
The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.
8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify; this is referred to
as a crossing selection.
When you release the mouse button, the view zooms in on the selected area.
9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button, you can roll the wheel to zoom the
view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again.
If you do not have a wheel mouse, use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom
out.
NOTE As you zoom in and out, Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents
less than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments, click Settings menu Snaps.
Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation
tools.
10 To display SteeringWheels, on the View toolbar, click
As you move the mouse, the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.
11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.
12 Click and hold the mouse button.
The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.
20 | Chapter 1 Introduction
18 Click and drag the left control, moving the cursor to the left horizontally, to lengthen the wall.
19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.
Move an element
20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.
(Move).
Some commands, such as Move and Copy, require 2 clicks to complete the command. After
selecting the element to move, for example, click to specify the starting position, and click again
to specify the ending position. In this case, you want to move the table closer to the wall.
22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.
Undo commands
(Undo).
All changes you make to a project are tracked. The Undo command allows you to reverse the
effects of one or more commands. In this example, you decide that you prefer the table in its
original position.
26 On the Undo menu, select the second item in the list, Move.
Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up
to and including the selected command. The table and plant are returned to their original
locations.
NOTE To quickly undo the previous action, on the Standard toolbar, click the Undo command, or
press CTRL+Z.
End a command
27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
Some commands, such as the Lines command, stay active or current until you choose another
command or end the current command.
28 Click in the drawing area to start the line, and click again to end it.
Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines.
22 | Chapter 1 Introduction
24
Express Workshop
25
26
Express Workshop
The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality, highlighting powerful features that are integral
to the most common architectural workflows. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are
common to an overall workflow. When you have finished these tutorials, you will have a basic understanding of the
design and documentation tools, as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an
architectural building project.
27
28 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
In the Project Browser, located directly to the left of the drawing area, the new drafting view is
listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim.).
NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any
graphical information. The drawing area is still blank.
Import a drawing detail
4 Click File menu Import/Link CAD Formats.
5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog, click Training Files, and navigate to
Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail.dwg.
6 In the Colors field list, select Black and White, and click Open.
7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model.
30 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
The reference callout is created, linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view
15 In the drawing area, double-click the reference callout tag head.
The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area.
16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view.
Next you will create a detail view and add detail components.
Model-Based Detailing
In this exercise, you will create a detail view defined by a callout, adjust the detail view display settings, and
then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly.
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_express_workshop_details_start.rvt.
Create a detail view
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, select Callout.
2 On the Options Bar, in the Type Selector, select Detail View: Detail, and in the Scale list, select
1 1/2 = 1-0.
3 In the drawing area, click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown.
Model-Based Detailing | 31
The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser, under Detail Views(Detail).
4 Right-click Detail 0, and click Rename.
5 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Wall Base 1, and click OK.
6 In the drawing area, select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips.
32 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area, bordered by a solid
line. This is the view crop region.
10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating
the boundary of the annotation crop region.
11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.
Model-Based Detailing | 33
16 Click OK.
The model elements in the view display as half-tones, allowing you to see the difference between
the model geometry and any added detail components.
34 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
21 Move the cursor up slightly, type 1' 6'', and press ENTER.
NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. If the crop region is
enlarged, the endpoints of the detail components may become visible.
Model-Based Detailing | 35
Plywood-Section1 : 3/4"
Resilient Flooring-Section
36 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
Model-Based Detailing | 37
Keynoting
In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element, map keynotes by material, and format
keynote styles.
The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple, consistent means of identifying building
assembly components, special notes, or instructions within a construction documentation package.
Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. You
can customize this list, or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. The text files can
then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. For more information about customizing a keynote
database, see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319.
Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise,
c_express_workshop_details_start.rvt.
Keynoting detail components
1 Click File menu Keynoting, and under Keynote Table, for Full Path, click Browse.
2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\Express
Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.txt.
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Keynote Element.
4 On the Options Bar, in the type selector, select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text, and verify that
Horizontal, Leader, and Free End are selected.
38 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
5 In the drawing area, place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard - 3/8" Joint to display the
value specified for the keynote parameter in the elements properties. If no value has been
specified, a question mark displays.
6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader.
Keynoting | 39
40 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
(Filter Selection).
Click OK.
NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions, but for training purposes, this tutorial
uses imperial units only.
In this lesson, you will perform the following tasks:
42 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
Training File
In the Project Browser, the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all), and the title block is displayed in
the drawing area.
In Revit Architecture, a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and
project-specific information.
Enter sheet specific information
You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet, or in the element properties of the
title block. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog, accessed from
the sheet in the Project Browser.
4 Type ZR, which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.
The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.
5 In the drawing area, drag the cursor to draw a rectangle, as shown:
The display zooms to the specified area. In this tutorial, when you want to change the area of
the model you are working on, you can enter ZE to zoom out. Then, enter ZR and specify a
zoom region to zoom in.
You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. To zoom in and out, roll the wheel. To pan,
hold down the wheel and drag.
6 In the Title Block, double-click Checker.
7 Enter K. Smith and press ENTER.
8 On the Design Bar, click Modify to clear the selection.
9 In the Project Browser, under Sheets(all), right-click A602 - Unnamed, and click Rename.
10 In the Sheet Title dialog:
Click OK.
NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the
title block.
Enter project information
Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. It can be entered or changed directly on
a sheet, or in the project information Element Properties dialog.
44 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
13 Click OK.
Modify the title block family
14 In the drawing area, select the title block.
15 In the Options Bar, click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing.
The Family Editor opens, displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block.
16 Type ZR, and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule.
Text.
18 On the Options Bar, in the Type Selector, select Text : 1/8'', and verify that
(Left) is selected.
19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown.
Label.
24 On the Options Bar, in the Type Selector, select Label : 3/16'', and verify that
(Top) are selected.
(Left) and
25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown, and click.
26 In the Edit Label dialog, under Category Parameters, select Project Status and click
the parameter under Label Parameters.
27 Select Wrap between parameters only, and click OK.
28 Using the same method, add Project Issue Date parameter, as shown.
46 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
to add
30 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.
Next you will create, and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet.
5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog, on the Appearance tab, under Text, clear Show Headers,
and click OK.
48 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.
14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown.
15 In the Project Browser, under Legends, right-click Keynote Legend - Project, and click Properties.
16 In the Element Properties dialog, for Filter, click Edit.
17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog, at the bottom of the Filter tab, select Filter by sheet,
and click OK.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, for View Name, enter Keynote Legend - Sheet, and click OK.
19 Click OK twice.
The Keynote Legend is now blank. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in
the drawing sheet, the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display.
NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in
the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text, not keynotes.
Add a detail view
20 In the Project Browser, expand Detail Views (Detail), and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area
between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet, as shown.
50 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
The keynote legend is automatically updated, displaying all keynote text and key values present
on the drawing sheet.
The view remains selected. The view title with line displays below the viewport.
When you place a view on a sheet, by default, Revit Architecture displays a view title. You can
specify text attributes for view titles, define the information to include in a view title, or omit
view titles from sheets. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets.
3 In the Type Selector, select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark.
The drawing list remains selected. Press ESC to clear the selection.
6 Type ZR, and zoom in on the drawing list.
52 | Chapter 2
Express Workshop
9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, clear Appears In Drawing List, and click
OK.
The drawing list display is updated, including only sheets that contain views.
You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.
54
55
56
Creating a Building
Information Model
In this tutorial, you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit Architecture 2009. You create a
retail building that contains 5 floors, a curtain wall, a central service core, and a sloped roof over one corner of the building.
As you develop the building design, you learn how to use parametric design techniques. Parametric design allows you to
incorporate design intent into your model. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between
elements in the model. For example, a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. If the grid moves, the wall or
column will move with it.
When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other, it is good practice to test the constraints, or flex the
model by changing parameters. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial, you learn how to constrain elements and
how to test the parametric relationships between them.
57
subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. In practice, you load any required family type that is not
in your project, such as a door or window, from the product library. The project training files have pre-loaded family types
and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise, so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises.
In views that display elevation markers, you design inside the elevation markers. Each marker
corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North, South, East, West. You can access these
views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow, or by opening the view in the Project
Browser.
Explore the project with the Project Browser
6 On the left side of the drawing screen, locate the Project Browser.
The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views,
sheets, schedules, and families in your project.
7 If necessary, expand Views (all), then expand Floor Plans, Ceiling Plans, and Elevations (Building
Elevation).
The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views,
reflected ceiling plan views, and elevation views created in the project by the template. These
views are customizable: you can rename them, change their properties, duplicate them, and
delete them. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building
information model.
NOTE If you create a project without a template, only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling
plan view are created.
8 Under Floor Plans, verify that Level 1 displays as bold.
The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view, the view you see in
the drawing area. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen, the software title bar contains
the name of the software and Project 1- Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor
plan view is current.
9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click South.
Two level lines, created by the template, display in the south elevation. Level lines are finite
horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model.
You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. You can add,
delete, and duplicate levels, as well as change their names, heights, and other properties.
10 In the Project Browser, notice the Legends, Schedules/Quantities, Sheets (all), Families, Groups,
and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all).
As you design and document your building model, content and building model reports, such
as schedules and legends, will be accessible from the Project Browser.
Save the project
11 Click File menu Save As.
12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog, click to scroll down to the bottom of the list, and click
Training Files.
13 In the file window, double-click Metric.
This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit
Architecture tutorials.
14 For File name, enter Revit Retail Building.
15 For Save as type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected.
16 Click Save.
As you complete the exercises in this tutorial, you will want to save your work frequently. You
can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. Click Settings
menu Options, and on the General tab, view the Save reminder interval.
You learn how the levels are locked, or constrained, to each other, so that when one level moves, the other
levels move and change with it. When you begin designing, you will use the levels to position building
elements such as walls, doors, and windows within the building model.
Modify the two default project levels
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and
double-click South.
2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line.
3 Double-click the Level 1 text, enter 00 Foundation, and press ENTER.
TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser, it is good practice to
precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the
Project Browser.
4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views.
5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans, notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling
plan views are now named 00 Foundation.
6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height, enter -1800, and press ENTER.
7 Double-click the Level 2 text, enter 01 Entry Level, and press ENTER.
8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views.
9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height, enter 0, and press ENTER.
11 On the left side of the Project Browser, view the Design Bar.
The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. By default, not all
the tabs are visible. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab, which should
display by default. If it does not, place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar, right-click, and
click Basics.
12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Level.
Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. This is
the Options Bar. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command
that you select on the Design Bar.
13 On the Options Bar, verify that
14 Click Plan View Types, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected, and click OK.
When you add the new level, a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created.
15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line, and then move it up.
As you move the cursor, a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and
the cursor position.
16 Enter 3750, and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line, 3750 mm above 01
Entry Level. (You do not have to click to specify the start point.)
17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing
levels, click to specify the endpoint of the level line, and press ESC.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 3, click Rename, and enter 02 Level.
19 Click OK.
20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view.
Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view.
21 In the Project Browser, verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well.
Next, you add another level, using a different option.
Use the Pick option to add a level
22 On Design Bar, click Level.
23 On the Options Bar, click
24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line, and move it slightly upward.
A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn, 3750 mm above the 02 Level
line.
25 Click to place the level line.
26 Press ESC, or on the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command.
27 Rename the level 03 Level, and rename the corresponding views.
Add the remaining 3 levels
28 Using either the Draw or Pick option, add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level.
Name the levels:
04 Level
05 Roof Garden
06 Roof
NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. If you create a level by copying it, the
associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. Copy levels only when you want to use them
for reference.
31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only.
Test the level constraints
Notice that by moving the top level, all the levels move. The lock icon that displays indicates
that the levels are vertically constrained. If you select a level and click its lock, the levels are no
longer constrained, and you can move them independently. Verify that the levels are vertically
constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Column Grid on page 64.
In the following exercise, you constrain the column heights to the roof level, so that if the roof elevation
changes, the column height changes as well. In a later exercise, you change the columns to round hollow
steel columns.
Create vertical column grid lines
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 00 Foundation.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Grid.
3 On the Options Bar, select
(Draw).
Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line.
4 Draw the first vertical grid line:
In the lower left corner of the drawing area, specify a start point for the grid line.
Move the cursor up, until it is positioned under the top elevation marker, and specify the
grid line endpoint.
The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.
Next, use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance
from the existing line.
6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line:
Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line, and then place the cursor on the grid line
to display the location of the second grid line.
Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B, and click to place the line.
Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C, and click to place the line.
Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D, and click to place the line.
8 Press ESC.
Create horizontal grid lines
9 Draw the first horizontal grid line:
On the upper left side of the grid, specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line
A.
Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E, and specify the grid line endpoint.
The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.
10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1.
11 On the Design Bar, click Grid.
12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm, add horizontal grid lines to
complete the grid, as shown.
(Aligned).
15 Starting with grid line A, select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble.
16 When you select the last vertical grid line, click the drawing area to the right of the line to place
the dimension.
17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing.
The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed.
18 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown.
At the bottom endpoint of the grid line, click and drag the blue circular grip up, until it is
closer to grid line 5, and press ESC.
At the left endpoint of the grid line, click and drag the blue circular grip to the right, until
it is closer to grid line A, and press ESC.
If necessary, adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them.
(Element Properties).
The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line
pattern. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in
both plan and section/elevation views.
31 For End Segments Length, enter 50mm.
32 Click OK twice.
33 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
37 Select the grid lines again, and in the Type Selector, select Grid : 6.5mm Bubble, and press ESC.
The original continuous grid lines are restored.
Add columns to the grid
38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar, click Structural Column.
39 In the Type Selector, select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC.
40 On the Options Bar:
(Grid Intersection).
Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the
grid line intersections of the column grid.
43 Press ESC.
44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B, and unlock it.
45 While pressing CTRL, select grid line A.
46 On the Options Bar, click Activate Dimensions, and then select the dimension value between
grid lines A and B.
47 Enter 9000, and press ENTER.
The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines.
48 On the Standard toolbar, click
49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. If it is unlocked, lock it.
Next, create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. You want
to view the columns as if you were walking toward them.
Create a 3D perspective view of the building
50 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
51 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
52 On the Options Bar, for From, select 01 Entry Level.
53 Place the camera and select its target point:
Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid, and click to specify a point beyond the
last horizontal grid line to place the camera.
Move the cursor next to grid bubble A, and click to place the target point of the camera.
The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red
and its grips display.
54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.
Adding Beams
In this exercise, you add beams to build the structure of the building model. You begin by adding beams to
the 01 Entry Level floor plan, and then copy them to subsequent levels.
When you finish adding beams, you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level.
A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current
view. The view is currently set to Coarse, which displays the structural elements in your view
as single lines.
4 Click Medium.
5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
6 In the Type Selector, verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected.
7 On the Options Bar, click
Adding Beams | 73
(Default 3D View).
to the 5th level. When you created the columns, you specified their height to reach only the
05 Roof Garden level.
(Element Properties).
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Top Level, select 06 Roof, and click OK.
24 Press ESC.
The columns now extend to the top level of the building, 06 Roof.
25 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building, and if necessary, resize the
view to see the entire structure.
Adding Beams | 75
NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view, press ESC to exit the command before continuing.
Adding Braces
In this exercise, you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. To better add the braces to the
structure, you create 8 framing elevation views.
Adding Braces | 77
10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level, and click to specify
the endpoint of the brace.
11 Using the same technique, add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. After
you add the final brace, press ESC twice.
NOTE Do not copy or array braces. You must place them one by one to establish the proper
connections between elements.
Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity
12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height, enter 18000 mm, and press ENTER.
The height of the roof lowers.
IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level, delete it and redraw it. Make sure that you
use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.
Adding Braces | 79
13 Double-click the 04 Level height, enter 10000 mm, and press ENTER.
14 On the Standard toolbar, click
Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure
18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views, as shown in the 3D view
below.
NOTE As you add braces, periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as
expected.
Adding Braces | 81
Creating a Foundation
In this exercise, you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that
distributes the building load to the ground.
Before you can add the pile caps, you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. You learn
how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software, and how to load specific families
into a project. After you load the pile cap family, you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view,
where you must adjust the view range before you can see them.
Load a pile cap family
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 00 Foundation.
2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar, click Foundation Isolated.
3 In the Revit dialog that displays, click Yes to load a new structural foundation family.
4 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular.rfa.
Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project
5 In the Project Browser, expand Families, and expand Structural Foundations.
The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree.
6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes).
7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm, and drag it to the drawing area.
Add the first pile cap
8 At the top left of the grid, click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1.
A warning displays.
9 Close the warning dialog, and press ESC twice.
The pile cap has been added in the view, but the current depth of the view does not allow you
to view it.
10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range:
In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
In the View Range dialog, under View Depth, for Level, select Unlimited.
Click OK twice.
Creating a Foundation | 83
13 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure.rvt.
(Element Properties).
(Default 3D View).
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
22 Proceed to the next exercise, Linking the Structural Model on page 87.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.rvt.
The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in
a host project and linked projects. In this case, the host project is the architectural file and the
linked project is the structural model. You use the Link option because it is likely that the
structural model will change. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants
is to link in the structural model; however, it is also possible to design the structural components
as part of the architectural model, depending on the project.
6 In the drawing area, select the linked Revit model.
7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar, click Copy.
After the link is established, you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into
the host project. Grids, structural members, and walls could also be copy/monitored.
8 On the Options Bar, select Multiple.
9 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select Levels 00 through 06.
20 In the drawing area, select the Topography : Surface, right-click, and click Hide in
view Category.
21 In the drawing area, select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1, right-click, and click Hide in
view Category.
22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.
35 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename.
36 In the Rename View dialog, enter To Building, and click OK.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
37 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Floors on page 92.
Adding Floors
In this exercise, you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building.
To create floors, you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. Some other Revit Architecture elements, such
as roofs, stairs, and railings are also created from sketches. In this exercise, you learn some different techniques
that you can use when sketching objects.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors.rvt.
Using a crossing window, sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid.
The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the
next steps.
(Rectangle).
3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge:
At the top left corner of the grid, select the top floor line, and then the first horizontal grid
line.
Move the cursor to the left, past the first vertical grid line, and click above the first horizontal
grid line to place the dimension.
Leave this dimension unlocked. If the grid changes size, the 01 Entry Level floor will resize
with it.
4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Do not lock the
dimension.
Adding Floors | 93
5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions.
At the top left corner of the grid, select the top floor line.
Move the cursor to the left dimension, and click the temporary dimension value.
Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300.
Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid, and change their values to 300
mm.
Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line, and move the cursor until the dashed blue
line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor.
IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines.
The 02 Level floor sketch displays.
12 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid
as shown, and lock the dimensions.
Adding Floors | 95
13 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor
and the grid.
14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
The 02 Level floor displays.
Add the 03 Level floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 03 Level.
The 02 Level floor is visible in the view.
16 On the Design Bar, click Floor.
17 On the Sketch tab, click Lines.
18 On the Options Bar, click
(Rectangle).
(Align).
The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active.
21 Select the top 02 Level floor line, and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch.
The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line, and a lock icon displays.
22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor.
23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to
constrain the floors.
Adding Floors | 97
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
37 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Roof on page 98.
Adding a Roof
In this exercise, you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building.
To create the roof, you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. You sketch the footprint
(perimeter) of the roof in a plan view.
You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under
the roof. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof.rvt.
Click
(Pick Lines).
5 Move the cursor over grid line E, and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line.
When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.
6 Select grid line 5, move the cursor slightly below the grid line, and when the blue dashed line
displays, click to place the roof line.
Adding a Roof | 99
10 Press ESC.
11 Trim the rooflines:
(Trim/Extend).
Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want
to keep), and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5.
Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.
15 On the Options Bar, for Elevation, enter -100 mm, and press ENTER.
16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4.
(Element Properties).
(Default 3D View).
37 If necessary, on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
44 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall.rvt.
(Element Properties).
Click OK twice.
Click
(Pick Lines).
9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint, and move it slightly toward the building
interior.
10 When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the first curtain wall segment.
11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset
600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior.
13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to
the grid, and lock the dimensions.
If the grid moves, the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. These dimensions are
not in a sketch, so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them, you can delete the
dimensions, but opt to keep the constraints when prompted.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Entrance on page 107.
Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main
building entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt.
11 When all 9 panels are selected, click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.
12 With the panels selected, in the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid.
13 Click View menu Apply View Template.
14 In the Apply View Template dialog, select Architectural Elevation, and click OK.
15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing.
16 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level Medium.
The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named
for, in this case an architectural elevation. If you select View Visibility/Graphics, you see that
the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are
selected.
17 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.
18 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line, and click to select it.
(Default 3D View).
35 Zoom in to the front of the building, and view the new entrance.
38 Press DELETE.
39 Using the same process, remove the mullions from the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th panels.
40 Optionally, open the North elevation, and add an entrance to the north side of the building.
Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
41 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.rvt.
Create a callout
6 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
The cursor changes to a pencil, which indicates you must draw the callout.
7 Place the callout:
Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column, and click to complete the
callout.
8 Select the callout, select the grip closest to the callout head, and drag the grip down to position
the callout head below the grid as shown.
9 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level, and click Rename.
10 In the Rename View dialog, enter Display Area, and click OK.
Create a section
11 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
12 Draw a section line, as shown.
16 Select the section box, and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level.
17 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 1, and click
Rename.
18 In the Rename View dialog, enter Section Display Area, and click OK.
Draw interior walls
19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
21 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Interior - 135mm Partition (2-hr).
22 On the Options Bar:
Click
(Draw).
Click
(Rectangle).
23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor, and then specify a point near the intersection
of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines.
28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid, and lock
the dimension.
29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid, and lock
the dimension.
Add a ceiling
30 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Ceiling.
32 In the Type Selector, select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid.
33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space.
(Element Properties).
42 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Base Offset, enter 2700 mm, and click
OK.
43 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling, click to select it, and click
(Element Properties).
45 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2700
mm, and click OK.
46 Press ESC.
47 In the Project Browser, under Sections, double-click Section Display Area.
Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling, press TAB until you select the wall chain,
and click to select the walls.
54 Click OK.
55 In the Type Properties dialog, click Cancel.
56 In the Element Properties dialog, click Cancel.
Rotate the ceiling grid
57 Select the center ceiling grid line.
58 On the Edit toolbar, click
(Rotate).
59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid.
61 Press ESC.
62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair.rvt.
4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs:
Move the cursor over grid line C, and click to create a reference plane to the left.
Move the cursor over grid line B, and click to create a reference plane to the right.
Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight
displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining, and specify a point to create
first stair flight.
Move the cursor horizontally to the left, and select the 2nd reference plane.
Move the cursor down, beyond the end of the stair, and specify a point.
The complete stair displays, with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain.
10 On the Options Bar, click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair, including its handrails.
Click
(Rectangle).
Select the interior face of the wall, and specify a point away from the wall.
Click Modify.
Select the wall, select the dimension value, enter 1200 mm, and press ENTER.
(Undo).
25 While pressing CTRL, select both reference planes, and press DELETE.
Add a door to the stairwell
26 On the Design Bar, click Door.
27 In the Type Selector, select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm.
28 On the Options Bar, clear Tag on Placement.
29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door.
TIP To flip the door swing, press the SPACEBAR before you place the door.
(Element Properties).
Click OK.
(Element Properties).
Click OK.
(Default 3D View).
(SteeringWheels).
37 Press and hold the Orbit button, and move the cursor to spin the building model.
You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building, but if you view
the top level of the building, you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. You must
cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs.
Click
(Draw).
Click
(Rectangle).
46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls, and lock the
alignments.
47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair, and lock the
alignment.
(Default 3D View).
Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening.
(Element Properties).
(Default 3D View).
(SteeringWheels).
60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile.rvt.
(Align).
8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall, and then select the right face of the wall.
9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements.
14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value, enter 9750, and press ENTER.
15 In the error dialog, click Remove Constraints.
16 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
17 On the Options Bar, click
, and click
(Fillet arc).
18 In the upper right corner of the profile, select a point on the profile to the left of the corner,
select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner, and select a third point within the
corner to create a rounded corner, as shown:
, and click
(Circle).
20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc, as shown:
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
24 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_host.rvt.
(Default 3D View).
9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube, and move the mouse to orient the view
to the Southwest, as shown.
View the roof, and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the
roof.
(Element Properties).
Click
(Pick Lines).
23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B.
24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and
B, and click to place the line.
25 Using the same method, sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5.
(Draw).
32 Press ESC.
33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B, move the cursor up 900 mm,
and click to finish the line.
(Trim/Extend).
35 Select the line that you just drew, and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom
horizontal line of the floor.
36 Select the line between grid lines A and B, and then select the line that you sketched between
grid lines 4 and 5.
37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5, and then select the horizontal line
near grid line 1.
Next, create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element.
39 Select the sidewalk, and on the Options Bar, click
(Element Properties).
NOTE If necessary, you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement.
52 In the Type Selector, select M_RPC Female : Cathy, and click to place her on the sidewalk.
53 Move the cursor clockwise, about 30 degrees, and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex.
58 In the camera view (3D View 1), click the car, and click
(Element Properties).
59 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter -300 mm, and click OK.
60 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click West.
61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing.
Next, you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. When
you select a host for a component, you ensure that the components remain on the same plane
as the host.
Select a host for the RPC components
62 Select Cathy, and on the Options Bar, click Pick Host.
63 Click the sidewalk.
64 Select Alex, and on the Options Bar, click Pick Host.
65 Click the sidewalk.
If the sidewalk changes height, both Cathy and Alex will move with it.
66 Using the same method, pick the sidewalk as the host for the car.
View the front of the building
67 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
68 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.
The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. After the
service core is positioned, the elements will be ungrouped in the project.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core.rvt.
4 Press DELETE.
5 On the View toolbar, click
(Default 3D View).
Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. By deleting the stairwell from the 05
Roof Garden, you delete the entire stairwell.
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level, and zoom in to the linked
instance.
Position and align the group
15 On the Tools toolbar, click
(Align).
Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core.
Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms, and click to align
the center.
(Default 3D View).
(SteeringWheels), and spin the building to see the inserted group
Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as
the group is placed.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
22 Proceed to the final exercise, Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146.
You copy the railing type into your project from another project, where it is hosted within a railing family.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.rvt.
(Split).
14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C, and click to split the floor.
18 On the Design Bar, click Lines, and on the Options Bar, verify that Chain is not selected.
19 Select the left endpoint of the floor, move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long,
and click to place it.
20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew, move the cursor
horizontally to the right 1500 mm, and click to draw another line.
21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch.
22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched, move the cursor vertically
1500 mm, and click to draw another line.
23 Complete the sketch as shown.
(Align).
25 Select grid line B, select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B, and click the lock to lock
the alignment.
26 Select grid line D, select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D, and click the lock to lock
the alignment.
(Align).
28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown, and lock the alignment.
29 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. Lock the
dimensions.
Click
(Pick Lines).
36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown.
A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just
added.
Click
Documenting Your
Projects
In this section of the tutorials, you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. We wish to
thank BNIM Architects, a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project
to use for the tutorial training files in this section.
Located in Kansas Citys popular Crossroads Arts District, the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an
historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the
existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors, lofty ceilings, balconies, and a roof garden. As
the building is slated to receive historic tax credits, the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. The
additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse, exterior fire stairs,
and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.
NOTE For training purposes, slight modifications to the building design have been made.
153
154
In this tutorial, you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn to:
Create new project views, including plan, elevation, section, and detail views
Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects
Creating Views
In this lesson, you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views
from existing views, how to create section and elevation views, and how to create views from callouts that
you place in other views.
155
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Views.rvt.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Level 1 Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 1 Furniture Plan, and click OK.
4 In the Project Browser, double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.
14 On the View Control Bar, click the current scale, and click 1: 1000.
Next, hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.
Section view
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Views_in_progress.rvt.
Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Elevation.
3 In the Type Selector, select Elevation: Building Elevation.
4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1:100.
5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.
NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model
geometry.
Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.
Move the cursor down, and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid
lines 2 and 3.
18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents, and move them to just
outside of the left side of the building.
19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and
add a section head to the section line endpoint.
Click the midpoint of the section line, drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until
it cuts through the stair, and click to place it.
24 Select gridline F, select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble, and drag the
top segment of gridline F to the right, using the blue circular drag grip.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Views_in_progress.rvt.
Create a floor plan callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 In the Type Selector, select Floor Plan.
4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1:50.
5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan:
Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair, and click to specify a point to complete the
callout.
On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the callout boundary.
Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head, and move it to the left
side of the callout boundary.
Select the middle grip, and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.
Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building, and click to specify a point above and to
the right of the roof overhang.
Move the cursor diagonally down, and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof
overhang.
17 In the Project Browser, expand Detail Views (Details), and right-click Detail 0 Rename.
18 In the Rename View dialog, enter Roof Overhang Detail, and click OK.
Open the detail callout view
19 In the Project Browser, under Detail Views (Details), double-click Roof Overhang Detail.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Views_in_progress.rvt.
Modify the section mark head
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 Click File menu Open.
3 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, open Metric\Families\Annotations,
select Custom-Section Head.rfa, and click Open.
The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays.
Click OK.
24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing, and on the Options Bar, click
Click OK.
36 In the drawing, select the callout, and on the Options Bar, click
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG.rvt.
3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.
The crop region displays as red, and features blue triangular grips and break marks.
4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.
Callouts
Elevations
Grids
Levels
Sections
12 Click OK.
Callouts, elevation markers, grids, levels, and section lines are now hidden in the view.
14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click East, and click Create View Template From
View.
15 In the New View Template dialog, enter Black and White Presentation Elevation, and click OK.
16 In the View Templates dialog, click OK.
17 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North.
18 In the Project Browser, right-click North, and click Apply View Template.
19 In the Select View Template dialog, select Black and White Presentation Elevation, click Apply,
and click OK.
20 Using the same method, edit the crop region as before.
The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view.
Under Primary Range, for Bottom, select Level Below (Level 4).
Under View Depth, for Level, select Level Below (Level 4).
Click OK twice.
NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.
6 In the Project Browser, select Roof Plan, right-click, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
8 In the View Range dialog:
Click OK twice.
Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building
9 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Plan Region.
NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents
of the Plan Region.
10 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
11 On the Options Bar, click
(Rectangle).
In the left corner of the building, select the left endpoint of the outer wall.
Move you cursor diagonally, and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.
Click OK twice.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson,
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 Click View menu Visibility/Graphics.
3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.
(New).
6 In the Filter Name dialog, enter Rated Walls, and click OK.
7 In the Filters dialog, under Categories, select Walls.
8 Under Filter Rules:
Select contains.
Enter Hr.
9 Click OK.
10 On the Filter tab, click Add.
11 Select Rated Walls, and click OK.
12 On the Filter tab, for Rated Walls, under Projection/Surface, click Override under Patterns.
13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Color, click <No Override>.
You click the current color value to open the Color dialog, and apply a color.
14 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, select the red color, and click OK.
15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Solid Fill.
16 Click OK.
17 Using the same method, apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well.
18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, click OK.
On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog, click Remove, and click OK.
The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied
to the drawing at any time, but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson,
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1 Duplicate View Duplicate.
2 Select Copy of Level 1, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Unit 18 Plan Level 1, and click OK.
4 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom to Fit.
6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left, as shown.
9 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region Hide Crop Region.
Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown
10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Masking Region.
11 In the Type Selector, select Invisible lines.
NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region.
(Rectangle).
19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.
The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.
32 Select one of the lamps, right-click, and click Unhide in view Category.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats- Creating
Sheets.rvt.
The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The
text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project
information parameters with the appropriate text fields.
NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically
updates every time the project file is saved.
(Properties).
Click OK.
Anytown, MA 12345
12 Click OK.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, continue to add project information:
14 Click OK.
The new project information displays in the titleblock.
NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family.
A104 - Elevations
A105 - Elevations
A106 - Elevations
A107 - Sections
A108 - Stairs
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan
1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A102 - Floor Plan.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 1, and drag it to the sheet.
3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the
sheet, and click to place the view.
The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The red border around the view no longer displays.
7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet, align it with the East elevation,
and click to place it.
8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet, and on the Options Bar, click
14 In the Element Properties dialog, for View Scale, select 1:5, and click OK.
15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.
Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.
16 Select title bar, and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the
view.
NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar, zoom in to the grip, move the
cursor over it, and press TAB until it highlights.
22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers, and notice they
also reference the correct sheet numbers.
23 Click File menu Save.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
Click OK.
Click OK.
10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows off Shadows on.
12 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region Hide Crop Region.
In this tutorial, you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans, such as doors and windows. You also
learn to create different types of schedules, such as room and window schedules, in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects.
Tagging Objects
In this lesson, you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. You
learn how to
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging
Objects.rvt.
207
3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room Separation.
Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.
NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and
click Room and Area.
4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left, move the cursor to the right, and
click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the
dining area (top area of the drawing), as shown:
5 Using the same method, create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area
on the right, as shown:
6 Using the same method, create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area
from the living area.
10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag.rfa.
11 In the Tags dialog, click OK.
Tag rooms sequentially
12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room.
13 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on placement is selected.
14 For Offset, type 2400 mm.
15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view, and click to place the room
and tag.
The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged, and the rectangle contains the
room tag.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the room tag.
The room tag number displays in blue, indicating that it can be edited.
17 Zoom in on the tag number, click it, type U18-1, and press ENTER.
18 Click the room text label, type Entry, and press ENTER.
Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged.
Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed
tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor.
Entry door
7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click
Properties).
(Element
8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.
9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the
corresponding room tags.
10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.
11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.
25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.
9 Click Modify.
Modify tag placement
10 Zoom to the dining table.
Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.
11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.
13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs.
14 Click Modify.
15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader.
16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.
(Filter Selection).
21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK.
22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.
You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.
You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the
building model.
Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance
schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.
Count
Height
Level
Type Mark
Width
8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them
and clicking Move Up or Move Down.
9 Click OK.
A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.
The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant
view of the building model.
24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named
from A to H, as shown:
27 Click File menu Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
Training File
Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
Create project parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule.
2 Click Settings menu Project Parameters.
3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter.
4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category.
Select Type.
5 Click OK.
The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog.
6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail.
7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK.
Add project parameters to the schedule
8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties.
9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following
fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
Head Detail
Jamb Detail
Sill Detail
11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before
Comments.
12 Click OK twice.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.
6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in
order:
Count
Head Height
Sill Height
Width
Mark
7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces
a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18.
8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).
The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to
filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.
14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet.
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.
Name
Level
Area
In the schedule, for room 101, for Name, type Building Entry, and press ENTER.
On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Lines.
Under Custom colors, click the bright green swatch, and click OK.
4 Click OK twice.
8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.
15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry.
Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105).
19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1, and zoom in to the Corridor.
20 While pressing CTRL, select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas), as shown:
(Element Properties).
22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, clear Room Bounding, and click OK.
23 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
24 Open the Room Schedule.
Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room
bounding behavior of the walls.
32 Using the same method, add 2 more key names: Service and Public.
33 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Room Schedule, and click
Properties.
34 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
35 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available fields, select Room Style, and click Add.
36 Click OK twice.
37 Open the Room Schedule.
The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule.
38 Under U17-8, for Room Style, select Units.
Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms
39 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
40 Zoom to the drawing extents.
41 Draw a selection box around floor plan.
(Filter Selection).
43 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Rooms, and click OK.
All rooms are selected in the floor plan.
(Element Properties).
45 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Room Style, select Units, and click
OK.
All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. The Room Style specification will be
used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram.
48 Save the file.
Training File
Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
Create a room color scheme
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 Click Settings menu Color Fill Schemes.
(Duplicate).
4 In the New color scheme dialog, for Name, type Room Type, and click OK.
5 For Title, type Room Type.
6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, for Color, select Room Style.
7 Because you are creating a new color scheme, at the warning prompt, click OK.
8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, click OK.
9 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Properties.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, click the Color Scheme field.
11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, under Schemes, select Room Type, and click OK.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, for Visibility/Graphics Overrides, click Edit.
13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, under Visibility, expand Lines, and clear Room
Separation.
14 Click OK twice.
22 In the Color dialog, under Custom color, select blue, and click OK.
23 Using the same method, change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray, respectively.
24 Click OK.
(Element Properties).
(Filter Selection).
42 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Rooms, and click OK.
Assign all rooms the Units room style
43 On the Options Bar, click
44 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Room Style, select Units, and click
OK.
45 While pressing CTRL, select all the rooms in the stairwell, and the room to the right of the stair
on level 1 (Corridor 104).
46 Click
47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Room Style, select Public, and click
OK.
49 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Room Style, select Service, and click
OK.
55 Click
56 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Room Style, select Suites, and click
OK.
A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend.
62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and
the public stairs on the top floor.
64 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Upper Limit, select Loft.
65 For Limit Offset, type 0.0.
66 Click OK.
67 On the first level, select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104), the dining room, and
the living room.
68 Click
69 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Upper Limit, select Level 2.
70 For Limit Offset, type -254 mm.
71 Click OK.
72 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
4 In the Type Selector, select Basic Roof : Wood Joist - Insulation on Plywood Deck - EPDM.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
6 Click View menu New Material Takeoff.
7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog, under Category, select Roofs, and click OK.
8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog, under Available fields, click Family
and Type, and click Add.
9 Using the same method, add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.
10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab:
12 Click OK.
The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays.
Material: Cost
EPDM
16
Plywood
13.40
Rigid Insulation
50.80
Material: Description
Material: Cost
Wood Joist
5.35
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared
Parameters.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.
17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag.rft.
18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes.
(Add Parameter).
(Add
30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window, and press DELETE.
6 Move the cursor to the right, and click in the center of the corridor, above the exterior door as
shown.
7 Move the cursor down, through the door, and click outside of the building.
(Element Properties).
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, type 1-1, and click OK.
28 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path, and click
29 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, type 2-1, and click OK.
30 Using the same method, specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.
34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, while pressing CTRL,
select Path ID and Travel Distance, and click Add.
35 Click the Filter tab.
36 For Filter by, in the first field, select Path ID; in the second field, select contains; and in the third
field, type 1-.
37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.
38 For Sort by, select Path ID.
39 Clear Itemize every instance.
40 Click the Formatting tab.
41 Under Fields, select Travel Distance, and under Field formatting, select Calculate totals.
42 Click OK.
The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays.
43 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Level 1 Exit Distance, and click
Duplicate View Duplicate.
44 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance, and click Rename.
45 In the Rename View dialog, type Level 2 Exit Distance, and click OK.
46 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2 Exit Distance, and click Properties.
47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit.
48 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Filter by, in the third field, type 2-.
49 Click OK twice.
The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt.
Area
Volume
Width
Length
Assembly Code
Assembly Description
8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog, expand C - Interiors C10 - Interior Construction C1010
- Partitions C1010100 - Fixed Partitions, and select C1010145 - Partitions - Drywall w/ Metal
Stud.
9 Click OK twice.
10 In the schedule, expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt.
1 On the File menu, click Export ODBC Database.
2 In the Select Data Source dialog, click the File Data Source tab.
3 Click New.
4 In the Create New Data Source dialog, select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb), and click Next.
5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source, and click Next.
6 Click Finish.
7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog, under Database, click Create.
8 In the New Database dialog, for Database Name, type Revit_Project.mdb.
9 Under Directories, select a location for the database file, and click OK to create the database.
10 When the confirmation dialog displays, click OK.
11 Click OK 3 times.
12 Open the database in Microsoft Access.
NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access, the database display may be different than
that shown.
Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that
lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a
project. Additionally, tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because
these categories do not have types.
A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements, so that each table of elements includes
an Id column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different
tables. For example, instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instances
type, and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that
the instance is in.
In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category, a table is also created for each
key schedule in a project, as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture
exports. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule, in addition to
the Id column. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter, which is used
for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and
contain the ID of the key element.
One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. This table contains one row for each Uniformat
Assembly Code. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The
table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table.
262
Annotating and
Dimensioning
In this tutorial, you learn how to change the base elevation of a project, and how to annotate and dimension your Revit
Architecture 2009 projects.
263
Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the
building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height
relative to Level 1.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.
(Element Properties).
Click Duplicate.
In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK.
6 Click OK twice.
Relocate the project
7 Click Tools menu Project Position/Orientation Relocate this Project.
8 Select the Level 1 line.
By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the
project.
9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER.
By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project.
10 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom All To Fit.
The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the
other levels remains the same.
While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level.
16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu Save As, and save the exercise file with a
unique name.
17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.
Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building
models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary
dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be
explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions
are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.
Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension
and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and
angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in
the model.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise,
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
Place an overall linear dimension
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed
line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.
4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed
line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.
5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.
6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension.
The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain
walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions
can be constrained in this way.
14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters.
15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall.
16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that
you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.
Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances
17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click
to make all the dimension segments
equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.
29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline.
The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.
30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style.
Add text below a permanent dimension
You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value.
31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example
Text dialog displays.
. The Dimension
32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.
33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter.
34 Click OK.
Click
(Radial).
39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select
it.
40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension.
41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
Click
(Angular).
52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension.
53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise,
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
Open the Level 3 floor plan view
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.
Click Options.
Click OK.
These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening
widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.
6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise,
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
Override default dimension witness lines
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.
6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and
select it.
7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click
to place the dimension.
8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension.
9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.
15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls,
and click to place the dimension.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall
17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension.
18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag
the dimension down the wall.
19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.
20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with
the outer face of the partition wall.
21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a
witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall.
22 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing
Dimensions on page 286.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise,
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
Duplicate an existing dimension type
1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower
dimension.
2 Click
(Element Properties).
Click OK twice.
8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.
11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular
dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.
(None).
4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to
create a text box.
Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
7 Select the text box, and click
You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If
so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.
Click
(Add Right Arc Leader).
A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box.
Click
(Add Left Arc Leader).
Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.
21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click
Click Rename.
In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK.
Click OK twice.
(Arc).
28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.
29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text.
30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the
text box.
31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.
32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu Save As, and save the exercise file with a
unique name.
33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
296
Detailing
In this tutorial, you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. You can detail directly in a view of the building
information model, using detail components to represent materials like lumber, plywood, and metal studs. These
components display at the required scale. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model, like a standard
door header condition, you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. The "drafted" detail that you create
is not parametrically linked to the building model.
In order to detail from the building model, you must define the view in which you want to create a detail.
You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In the callout view, you trace over
the building model geometry, add detail components, and then complete the detail by adding break lines
and text notes.
297
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
(Element Properties).
18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Specify a point high enough
so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang.
NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Select the corrugated metal component, and on the Edit toolbar, click
(Move).
Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start
point.
Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point.
Click Modify.
Because you still have several components to load, you load them as a group from a single file.
Load components as a group
26 Click File menu Load from Library Load File as Group.
27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog, click Training Files, navigate to
Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components.rvt, and click Open.
28 In the Duplicate Types dialog, click OK.
29 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
30 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.
31 To properly orient the component, press SPACEBAR 3 times.
32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.
33 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal, and place
it in the detail view as shown.
37 Click Modify.
38 Select the horizontal segment, click the Flip instance arrows, and click Modify.
The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.
NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.
Add insulation
39 On the Design Bar, click Insulation.
40 On the Options Bar:
42 Click Modify.
43 Move the upper segment:
Select the upper segment of insulation, and on the Edit toolbar, click
(Move).
Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point.
Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.
Click Modify.
51 Click Modify.
52 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Lines on page 304.
4 Click Modify.
5 Select the vertical plywood component; drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm
component.
Click
(Pick Lines).
9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist, as shown.
Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result.
Click
(Pick Lines).
15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component, as shown.
16 On the Options Bar, select Chain, and draw the detail lines as shown.
20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line.
Modify display properties
21 In the drawing area, select the Penthouse level line, right-click, and click Hide in view Elements.
22 In the Project Browser, under Views Detail Views (Detail), right-click Roof Overhang Detail,
and click Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, for Graphics Display Model, select Do not display, and click
OK.
When you turn the display model off, the model elements such as walls and floors no longer
display in this view. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added.
24 On the View Control Bar, click
Click
(Pick Lines).
28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard, and then select the interior
edge of the horizontal segment.
32 Click Modify.
33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask,
select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.
34 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Text Notes on page 308.
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
Add text notes to the detail
1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Text.
2 On the Options Bar, click
6 Click Modify.
(Filter Selection).
6 In the Filter dialog, clear Detail Items and Dimensions, and click OK.
The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a
keynote.
7 Click Modify.
8 Zoom in to the metal coping; while pressing CTRL, select all the coping linework.
You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment, pressing TAB, and selecting the
chain.
14 Click Modify.
15 Use a window to select all linework; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
16 Click Modify.
17 Click File menu Save As.
18 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location; for File name, enter Roof Edge, and
click Save.
Add components to the detail
19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail, and the component can be
placed in the detail.
NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail - Keynotes view is not the open view, double-click it in the Project
Browser.
20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
21 To place the component, click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping.
22 Click Modify.
23 Using a window, select the coping.
While pressing SHIFT, deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected.
24 On the Options Bar, click
26 Press DELETE.
The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.
27 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
28 On the Options Bar, click Load.
29 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail
Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge.rfa, and click Open.
30 In the drawing area, click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.
31 Using the same method used previously, delete the underlying linework.
32 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Keynotes on page 312.
Adding Keynotes
In this exercise, you place keynotes on objects, and add keynote data to components that do not have data
associated with them.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
Add keynotes to components
1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Keynote Element.
2 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.
3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, navigate to
Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag.rfa, and click Open.
4 Add the tag:
In the drawing area, select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.
In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07000 07200 07210 07210.B5, 63mm Rigid
Insulation, and click OK.
6 Click Modify.
Assign keynote parameter to a component
7 In the drawing area, select the metal fascia with drip edge, and click
(Element Properties).
9 In the Type Properties dialog, for Identity Data Keynote, click in the Value column, and click
.
10 In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07645.F1, FasciaProfile_1.
11 Click OK 3 times.
12 On the Design Bar, click Keynote Element.
13 Tag components:
For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard, use keynote 09250.D1.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
Create a detail component
1 Click File menu New Family.
2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog, click Training Files, navigate to
Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based.rft, and click Open.
3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
4 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
5 In the drawing area, select the left end point of the reference line, and select the right end point.
6 Lock the line, and click Modify.
7 Click File menu Save As.
8 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location; for File name, enter m_Medium Line
Detail Component, and click Save.
9 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
Convert detail lines to components
10 In the drawing area, select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.
11 Press DELETE.
12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote.
13 In the Type Selector, select Medium Line Detail Component.
14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line.
15 Click Modify.
16 Select the component, and click
(Element Properties).
25 Next, you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light, invisible, and hidden)
used in the view. You add the components to the project and keynote them.
Add light line components
26 Zoom to the roof overhang.
27 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
28 In the Type Selector, select m_Light Line Detail Component.
29 In the drawing area, click the end points of the long detail line above the roof.
30 Click Modify.
31 Select the component, and click
40 Click Modify.
41 Select the component just added, and click
42 Using the same method used previously, name the component 50 x 200 Framing, and assign it
keynote 06110.G1.
43 Zoom to the repeating component.
44 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail, and click the lower end at the break line.
46 Click Modify.
47 Select the component, and click
48 Using the same method used previously, name the component Air Barrier, and assign it keynote
07260.A5.
49 With the component selected, on the Edit toolbar, click
(Move).
50 Move the air barrier to the right, against the 19mm plywood.
55 Click Modify.
56 Delete both dashed detail lines, leaving the detail component lines.
57 Select the vertical hidden line component, and click
58 Using the method used previously, name the component Vapor Barrier, and assign it keynote
07260.A4.
Add keynotes
59 Zoom to the drawing extents.
60 On the Design Bar, click Keynote Element.
61 In the drawing area, add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane, Air Barrier, 50 x 200 Framing, and
Vapor Barrier.
70 Using the method used previously, name the component Batt Insul., and assign it keynote
07210.A4.
71 In the drawing area, add a keynote for the component.
72 Save the file.
73 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319.
Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.A9, and press ENTER.
Enter 07460.
3 In the text editor, click File menu Save, and close the text editor.
Update keynote settings
4 In Revit Architecture, click Settings menu Keynoting.
5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog, under Keynote Table, click Browse.
6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog, navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes.txt, and click Open.
7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog, under Path Type, select Absolute, and click OK.
Work with keynotes
8 On the Design Bar, click Keynote Element.
9 In the drawing area, select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang); click to place
the leader, and click to place the note.
10 In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07463.A1, and click OK.
11 Click Modify.
12 Apply various keynote styles:
13 Click Modify.
14 Save the file.
Click Open.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) Drafting Views (Detail), right-click Drafting 1, and
click Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter EPDM Metal Coping, and click OK.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Reference Callout on page 321.
5 Click Modify.
6 Select the callout, and use the callout grips to move the callout head.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
Create a drafting view
1 Click View menu New Drafting View.
2 In the New Drafting View dialog, for Name, enter Header @ Sliding Door, and click OK.
3 On the View Control Bar, verify that the scale is 1 : 5.
Add a detail component
4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
5 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.
6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown.
Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it.
Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point.
16 Select the left edge of the region, select the width dimension, and enter 20.5mm.
17 Click Modify.
18 While pressing CTRL, select the left and bottom edges of the region.
19 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
20 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
(Mirror).
(Draw).
Move the cursor up, and click above the top of the region as the end point.
24 Select the mirrored region, and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.
25 Click Modify.
Add wood filled regions
26 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Region Properties.
28 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
29 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
30 In the Name dialog, enter Wood - Finish, and click OK.
31 In the Type Properties dialog, for Graphics Fill Pattern, click
32 In the Fill Patterns dialog, for Name, select Wood - Finish.
33 Click OK 3 times.
(Rectangle).
Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.
35 Select all the linework for the wood region; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150:
(Align).
Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150, and select the right edge of the wood region.
41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region, sketch the new region as shown; verify that
the width is 19mm and the height is 63.5mm.
Click
(Pick Lines).
45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.
You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.
(Align).
47 Click the reference plane, and click the bottom of the gypsum board region.
48 Click Modify.
Click
(Pick Lines).
Click
(Draw).
Select Chain.
Move the cursor left 25mm, and click to select the point.
Move the cursor down 305mm, and click to select the point.
Move the cursor right 25mm, and click to select the point.
(Trim/Extend).
55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch, and select the bottom horizontal line.
56 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Click
(Pick Lines).
60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region.
61 Click Modify.
62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER.
63 Repeat for the right detail line.
68 Click Modify.
69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.
74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint
of the 50 x 150.
Add detail lines
75 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.
76 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.
(Mirror).
87 Click Modify.
88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region; drag the top end above the mirrored
rectangles as shown.
(Mirror).
94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.
95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.
96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line.
97 On the Options Bar, click
98 Click the end of the detail line on the left, and click to place the arc as shown.
99 Click Modify.
Add two break lines
100 Zoom to the drawing extents.
101 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
102 In the Type Selector, select M_Break Line.
103 Add two break lines as shown.
TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.
Add dimensions
104 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
105 In the drawing area, select the left edge of the horizontal wood region, and select the right edge
of the adjoining vertical region.
106 Click to place the dimension, and click Modify.
110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.
126 In the drawing area, select the gypsum board region on the left, and click to place the text.
127 Enter Gyp. Board, and click Modify.
129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.
In this tutorial, you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation, including:
Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component
legends
Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets.rvt.
339
(Element Properties).
11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, type Seal existing doors and
insulate, and click OK.
12 On the Edit toolbar, click
(Copy).
13 Select the tag, and click above the tag to place the copy.
(Element Properties).
15 For Text, type Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for
specific requirements.
16 For Tag, type B.
17 Click OK.
18 Using the same method, make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.
20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building, position
the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays, and click.
Text
Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.
Tag
Text
On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add.
On the Formatting tab, for Heading, type Mark, and for Alignment, select Center.
On the Appearance tab, for Header text, verify that Arial is selected, for the value, type 6
mm, and select Bold.
26 Click OK.
The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.
On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add.
On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field,
select does not equal, and in the third field, type T.
4 Click OK.
The drawing list displays.
Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project.
The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and
building component legends.
Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with
text that identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol
legends.
Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames.
On construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule,
door frame schedule, and so on).
NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the
Revit Architecture building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on
a schedule or note block.
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
Create a legend view
1 Click View menu New Legend.
2 In the New Legend View dialog, for Name, type Typical Symbol Legend, and click OK.
Add symbols to the legend
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol.
4 Add the following symbols to the legend view, selecting each from the Type Selector and placing
it in the legend as shown.
M_Door Tag
M_Window Tag
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and for Leader, verify that
is selected.
12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.
13 Type Detail Callout for the text note.
14 Working from the top down, type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
Level Indicator
Door Tag
Window Tag
Sheet Keynote
For Family, select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider.
7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.
8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall.
14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text, and type Wall Type
1 Patio Divider.
NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line, for example to force a line break between
''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.''
15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.
17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.
18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.
19 Type the following text, pressing ENTER between component descriptions, and click Modify on
the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking.
The text note with leader is added to the legend.
20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall
component.
25 In the Project Browser, under Legends, select 4th Floor Wall Types, drag it onto the sheet, and
click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet.
(Match Type).
32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view, select the Wall Type 2 component.
Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled, indicating that it captured the wall type properties.
33 In the floor plan view, zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider
wall.
36 Optionally, click
8 Click OK.
9 Save the file.
(Move).
5 Select the divider, move the cursor up, and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper
wall.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise,
m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
Load a revision tag
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 4.
2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud.
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag By Category.
4 On the Options Bar, click Tags.
5 In the Tags dialog, scroll down to Revision Clouds.
Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds, you need to add one.
6 Click Load.
7 In the left pane of the dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag.rfa.
8 In the Tags dialog, notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds; click OK.
Tag a revision cloud
9 On the Options Bar, select Leader.
10 In the drawing area, position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.
If the cursor is just inside the cloud, the tag is displayed inside the cloud.
11 Click to place the tag.
The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. The number is based on the numbering
method you specified when you set up the revision table. Because you chose to number by
project, and because the revision is the first in the project, the cloud is tagged as number 1.
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise,
m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
View the revision schedule on a sheet
1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, double-click A107 - Unnamed.
2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock.
The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision
schedule.
After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet, you
prevent further changes to the revision. You do this by issuing the revision.
Issue a revision
3 Click Settings menu Revisions.
4 For the Sequence 1 revision, select Issued, and click OK.
NOTE After you issue a revision, you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the
revision in the drawing area, nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.
Create additional revisions
5 Click Settings menu Revisions.
Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You can continue to add revisions.
6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog, click Add.
A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.
7 For Description, type Modify Paving Area, and enter a date for the revision.
8 Add another revision row, with the description Relocate Door, and enter a date.
9 Click OK.
17 Using the same method learned previously, apply Seq. 3 - Relocate Door to the revision cloud.
Tag the revision clouds
18 On the Drafting tab, select Tag By Category.
19 To add tags, in the drawing area, click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew.
20 On the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A107 - Unnamed.
21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock.
Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule.
Click Options.
You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme.
24 In the Sequence Options dialog, for Sequence, delete the first 3 characters.
25 Click OK twice.
The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters, beginning with "D".
Select Outline, and select Wide Lines for the outline type.
32 Click OK twice.
Relocate revision schedule
You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area, and delete the schedule lines because
the table will be dynamically built.
33 Select the schedule header, and drag it above the schedule area.
4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.
Importing Spreadsheets
In this exercise, you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.
The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as
an image.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise,
m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, double-click A102 - Unit 18.
2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet, Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.xls.
NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This process may vary from system
to system. This exercise demonstrates a common method.
3 In Microsoft Excel, click File menu Print.
4 Under Printer, for Name, select the document writer.
5 Click OK.
6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog, click Desktop, for File name, type Fixture
Schedule.mdi, and click Save.
Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format, you could use a screen capture utility to
save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. This step has been completed for you, and saved as
Fixture Schedule.JPG.
7 In the Revit Architecture window, click File menu Import/Link Image.
8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\Fixture
Schedule.JPG.
9 Click to place the image on the sheet.
10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule.
In this tutorial, you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.
The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site, as well as a large lab building.
The large floor plan, or footprint, for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. To effectively document
this project, you break up the plan into sections, called dependent views.
371
Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent
views
Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project
Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.rvt
2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View Duplicate as a Dependent.
The dependent view opens.
3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK.
5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit.
6 In the drawing area, select the crop region.
The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible.
The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.
7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to
crop out the lab building.
8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area
of the drawing (the aviary).
10 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View Duplicate as a Dependent.
12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename.
13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK.
14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
15 Select the crop region.
16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).
17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.
20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
Add matchline to indicate split view
21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.
22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline.
Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for
dependent views.
23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:
Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align
with the second column of lab cubicles.)
Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.
Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.
The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.
41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs.
42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.
43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end
of the matchline.
NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.
48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the
annotation region so you can see the view reference.
NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the
view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.
49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the
room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide
in view Elements.
50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in
the view.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.rvt
2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View Duplicate as a
Dependent.
6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view,
cropping the view to the aviary.
8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View Duplicate as a
Dependent.
9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename.
10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK.
11 Select the crop region.
12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing,
cropping the view to the lab building.
20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the
sheet.
21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.
28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right.
29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.
389
390
10
In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior
views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.
391
You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the
perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that
define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.
change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house.
change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete.
define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool
house wall.
When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the
pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.
3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click
Properties).
(Element
You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall,
so you can change the render appearance for the material.
11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and
click OK.
You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You
make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish.
12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish.
13 Click Update Preview, and click OK.
The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can
be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results.
Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete
14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click
(Element Properties).
The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default
material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.
(Duplicate).
27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black,
and click OK.
28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading.
By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color
defined by the render appearance.
29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.
30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK.
31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern),
and click OK.
40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the
materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad).
NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise
render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.
41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.
43 Click Render.
The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of
the rendering process.
44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog,
under Display, click Show the model.
45 Close the Rendering dialog.
46 Click File menu Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt.
47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.
In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering.
NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are
referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt.
Add shrubs and trees to the site
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.
2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.
6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the
project, similar to the locations shown.
7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left
of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.
(Element Properties).
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt.
Place a camera in the site view
1 With the Site view open, on the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target
point:
Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the
camera.
Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point
of the camera.
Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.
6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Exterior - Day, and click OK.
8 In the Project Browser, double-click Exterior - Day to open the view, and make any final
adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition.
9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.
You then duplicate the view, modify render settings, and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the
exterior.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt.
Display the perspective view
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Exterior - Day.
You create a location and time for the rendering. For information on how the rendering/sun
relates to the location settings, see Re-orienting the Project on page 447.
3 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Sun, select Edit/New.
4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, select Spring Equinox, and click Rename.
5 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Spring Equinox - Santa Monica, 3pm.
6 Click OK twice.
7 In the Rendering dialog, under Background, select Sky: Cloudy.
You adjust cloud settings as required. In this case, the sky will be a procedural sky based on
cloud settings and time of day.
NOTE If a background image is required, export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. The PNG
and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during
photoediting.
8 Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium, and click Render.
Click Save.
(Show Rendering
17 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Artificial only, and click
Artificial Lights.
You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.
Create lighting groups
18 In the Artificial Lights - Exterior - Night, dialog, under Group Options, click New.
Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.
19 In the New Light Group dialog, for Name, enter Pool Lights, and click OK.
20 In the Artificial Lights dialog, under Ungrouped Lights, highlight 9 :Sconce Light - Flat Round
: 60W - 120V through 14 :Sconce Light - Flat Round : 60W - 120V, and click Move to Group.
To select a sequential list, select the first light, press and hold SHIFT, and select the last light.
21 In the Light Groups dialog, verify that Pool Lights is selected, and click OK.
22 Using the same method, add 30 :Sconce Light - Flat Round : 60W - 120V through 35 :Sconce
Light - Flat Round : 60W - 120V to the Pool Lights group.
23 In the Artificial Lights dialog, under Group Options, click New.
24 In the New Light Group dialog, for Name, enter Pool House Lights, and click OK.
25 Using the same method, under Ungrouped Lights, add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture
to the Pool House Lights group.
26 In the Artificial Lights dialog, click OK.
27 In the Rendering dialog, click Render.
30 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model, and then switch between the views by clicking
Show the rendering.
31 Close the Rendering dialog.
32 Save the file.
33 Proceed to the next lesson, Rendering an Interior View on page 411.
To create the rendered view, you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house,
define the perspective view and rendering settings, and finally, render the views.
(Rotate).
Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees, and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity.
(Element Properties).
In order to see the figures reflection, the reflective properties must be turned on for the family
type. By default, the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering
performance. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering, you can enable this
option.
9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Render Appearance Properties, click Edit.
11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog, under Parameters, select Cast Reflections.
12 Click OK 3 times.
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
14 Save the file.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt.
Add a camera
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Exact placement is not
important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps.
2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point:
Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.
Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point.
14 In the 3D view, select the section box, right-click, and click Hide in view Category.
15 Maximize the 3D view, and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt.
Define lighting for a nighttime view
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename.
2 In the Rename View dialog, enter Interior - Night, and click OK.
4 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Scheme, select Interior: Artificial only.
The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an
interior rendering without daylight. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete
using the Adjust Exposure option.
5 Click Artificial Lights.
6 In the Artificial Lights dialog, clear Pool Lights, and click OK.
Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering, you turn them off for
this scene. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions
for views.
7 Under Quality, for Setting, select Draft.
You can specify a lower quality, and render the view to check lighting levels and material
selections. After these settings are established, the view can be rendered at a higher quality level.
8 In the Rendering dialog, click Render.
Click OK.
Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light.
In the next steps, you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect.
20 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model, and close the Rendering dialog.
Modify the column material
21 In the drawing area, select the column on the right, and on the Options Bar, click
Properties).
View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood.
(Element
For Amount, move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5.6.
You change the varnish setting, add a bump map to create texture, and rotate the material so
that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column.
26 Click Update Preview, and click OK.
Create a print quality rendering
27 On the View Control Bar, click
After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material
selection, you can define the output and quality settings for final output. The rendered output
can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image
can be controlled. As size and DPI are increased, the render time increases significantly.
28 In the Rendering dialog, clear Region.
29 In the Rendering dialog, under Output Settings, for Resolution, select Printer.
30 In the drawing area, select the crop boundary, and on the Options Bar, click the dimensions for
Size.
31 In the Crop Region Size dialog:
Click OK.
32 In the Rendering dialog, for Setting, select High, and click Render.
The rendered image displays. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project.
Recording a Walkthrough
After you create a walkthrough, you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any
available video player, independent of the Revit Architecture software. When you export your walkthrough
to an AVI, you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough:
Wireframe
Shading
Rendering
Creating a Walkthrough
In this exercise, you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.
You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse, proceeds through the dining
room, and ends in the far corner of the living room.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Townhouse.rvt.
NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use metric values, click
Settings Project Units, and change unit formats as desired.
Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 1st Floor.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Walkthrough.
TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and
click the tab in the context menu.
3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view, on the Options Bar, verify that Perspective
is selected.
4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room, and click to specify the start point
(the first key frame) of the walkthrough.
5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown.
6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room, on the Options
Bar, click Finish.
Edit and play the walkthrough
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) Walkthroughs, and double-click Walkthrough 1.
The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed, surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as
shown. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the
walkthrough path is not precisely the same.
8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with
blue grips. If it is not, select the crop boundary.
Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.
9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region, on the Options Bar, click the
dimensions for Size.
10 In the Crop Region Size dialog, for Width, enter 16'', and for Height, enter 9''.
11 Under Change, verify that Field of view is selected, and click OK.
12 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom Out (2x), and select the crop boundary.
15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog, enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the
walkthrough from 300 to 60, and click OK.
16 On the Options Bar, for Frame, enter 1, and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from
the beginning (the key frame).
17 Click
The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.
NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time, press ESC.
18 When the walkthrough stops playing, proceed to the next exercise, Changing the Walkthrough
Path and Camera Position on page 428.
(Element Properties).
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Far Clip Active, and click OK.
Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.
Edit the walkthrough path
4 On the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough.
The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast
room.
5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip), and adjust it to view the kitchen as
shown.
Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration, so do not be concerned if the
camera displays at a slightly different location.
11
The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Exterior
solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Interior solar studies
can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.
In this tutorial, you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you
define. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the
other as a series of images.
More specifically, you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design
by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.
A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.
A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.
A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.
431
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Solar_Study.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 01 Entry.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera
and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point, as shown.
A 3D view is created. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises
because of minor variations in camera placement.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, right-click Section 1, and click Rename.
8 In the Rename View dialog, enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway, and click OK.
Create 3D section view
9 On the View toolbar, click
10 On the View toolbar, click
.
(SteeringWheels).
11 On the SteeringWheel, click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu, and click Orient
to View Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway.
12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right, as shown.
14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
15 In the Rename View dialog, enter Solar Study Section Cutaway, and click OK.
16 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level Coarse, then select Medium, then Fine.
NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse, some structural elements are shown as a single line rather
than solid and do not cast a shadow. In some cases, changing to Medium or Fine provides a better
view for a shadow study.
17 To hide the section box, click View menu Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories
tab, clear Section Boxes, and click OK.
18 On the File menu, click Save.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435.
(SteeringWheels).
9 On the SteeringWheel, click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu, and click Orient
to View Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.
10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side, as shown.
17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.
18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
19 In the Rename View dialog, enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway, and click OK.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level Fine.
21 On the File menu, click Save.
Display study views
22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you
created in this lesson:
The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. You can create a still, single-day, or multi-day
solar study.
5 Click the Single-Day tab.
For the Single-Day solar study, you specify the location, date, and time range, as well as a time
interval for the frames of the solar animation.
6 Click the Multi-Day tab.
For the Multi-Day solar study, you specify the location, date range, and time, as well as a time
interval for the frames of the solar animation.
7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Click the Single-Day tab.
8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA is selected, and click Duplicate.
9 In the Name dialog, enter Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and click OK.
10 Under Place, click
Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project.
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Winter Solstice, Los Angeles,
and click OK.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, click OK.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Preview Solar Study.
7 On the Options Bar, under Frame, you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study
animation:
8 On the Options Bar, click the control buttons to preview the animation:
.
.
.
NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar.
Preview summer solstice animation
9 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Advanced Model Graphics.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, for Sun Position, click
11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Summer Solstice, Los
Angeles, and click OK.
12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, click OK.
13 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Preview Solar Study.
14 On the Options Bar, click
The solar study animation plays, showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location
and date specified.
Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area, approximately as shown.
4 Sketch rooms:
Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area, as shown.
Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area, as shown.
NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space.
Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where
direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout.
5 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Advanced Model Graphics.
7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, verify that Cast Shadows is selected.
8 For Sun Position, click
9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Summer Solstice, Los
Angeles, and click OK.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, click OK.
11 To display the section box, click View menu Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories
tab, select Section Boxes, and click OK.
12 In the drawing area, select the section box.
13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang,
as shown.
NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control.
14 Click outside of the section box, and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area,
if necessary.
15 To hide the section box, click View menu Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories
tab, clear Section Boxes, and click OK.
Export as AVI
16 Click File menu Export Animated Solar Study.
17 Specify the export options:
In the Length/Format dialog, under Output Length, select Frame Range, and enter 5 to 50.
NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the
terrain. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames.
For Frames per second, verify that the value is set to 15.
Under Format, for Model Graphics Style, verify that Hidden Line is selected.
For Dimensions, enter 450 in the first field (width), and click in the second field (height) to
see the value dynamically changed.
To maintain the proportions of the frame, you only enter one dimension and the other one
is calculated automatically. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame
dimensions.
Click OK.
In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog, click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file
to the computer Desktop.
For File Name, enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway - Los Angeles.
18 Click Save.
19 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is
selected, and click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop.
NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. The AVI can then typically be
played from within the zip file.
20 Click File menu Save.
21 Proceed to the next exercise, Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443.
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Winter Solstice, Los Angeles,
and click OK.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, click OK.
6 Click File menu Export Animated Solar Study.
7 Specify the export options:
In the Length/Format dialog, under Output Length, select Frame Range, and enter 5 to 10.
For Frames per second, verify that the value is set to 15.
Under Format, for Model Graphics Style, verify that Hidden Line is selected.
For Dimensions, enter 450 in the first field (width), and click in the second field (height) to
see the value dynamically changed.
Click OK.
In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog, click the Desktop icon.
For File name, enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway - Los Angeles.
NOTE When you export to PNG, or any single-frame format, such as JPEG, TIFF, BMP, or GIF, it is
recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several
files, depending on the Frame Range. In this example, the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid
cluttering the Desktop.
8 Click Save.
The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. The resulting PNG images are date
and time stamped, as shown:
NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.
3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts,
as shown.
5 Select the roof, and on the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate Hide Category.
Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.
Create multi-day solar study
6 To hide the section box, click View menu Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories
tab, clear Section Boxes, and click OK.
7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar:
10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Multi-Day tab.
11 Select Multi Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA, and click Duplicate.
12 In the Name dialog, for File name enter 2pm - Los Angeles - Week Interval, and click OK.
13 Specify values for the multi-day study:
Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain, and click OK.
In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog, for File Name, enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan
Cutaway.
16 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, select Full Frames (Uncompressed), and click
OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.
17 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Solar Study Off.
18 Click File menu Save.
6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, and select Winter Solstice, and click
OK.
7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, click Apply.
Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view.
9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Still tab, select Summer Solstice.
10 Under Date and Time, specify 11:00 AM for time, and click OK.
NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting, so you may need to make your own
adjustment for specific studies. For example, to see the sun at its highest point on June 22, you would
set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM.
12 Under Date and Time, change the time back to 12:00 PM, and click OK.
16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, and select Winter Solstice, and click
OK.
17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, click OK.
Rotate project to True North
True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. Plan views are defined to use Project
North or True North for the representation. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project
North, the view settings must be set for True North.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
19 In the Project Browser, right click 01 Entry, and click Properties.
20 In the Element Properties dialog, for Orientation, select True North, and click OK.
Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to
Project North. When a project is started, the Project North and True North are coincident and
pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases).
IMPORTANT After you toggle the views, make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out.
This process establishes the view setting to True North.
21 Click Tools menu Project Position/Orientation Rotate True North.
22 Re-orient the project:
To relocate the rotation center point, click at the intersection of the arrows that have been
draw in the project representing True North and Project North.
NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship
between Project North and True North.
To establish the True North direction, click above the end of the magenta line representing
True North.
To establish the new direction of True North, click toward the top of the screen, as shown.
25 In the Project Browser, right-click 01 Entry, right-click, and click Duplicate View Duplicate.
26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry, and click Rename.
27 In the Rename View dialog, enter True North Orientation, and click OK.
28 In the Project Browser, select True North Orientation, right-click, and click Properties.
29 In the Element Properties dialog, for Orientation, select True North, and click OK.
Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North.
View the solar study with the Project North orientation
30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.
31 Click View menu Refresh.
Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North.
34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, select Summer Solstice, and click
Apply.
35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Single-Day tab, click Summer Solstice, Los
Angeles, and click OK.
36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, click OK.
In the Length/Format dialog, under Format, for Dimensions, enter 600 in the first field, and
click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically.
Click OK.
In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog, click the Desktop icon.
For File Name, enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway.
Click Save.
38 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is
selected, and click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.
NOTE Retain the 45 value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow
display for this project.
39 Click File menu Save.
to house from SW
living area
This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room.
On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, select Winter Solstice, and click
Duplicate.
In the Name dialog, enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles, and click OK.
In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, under Settings, for Date and Time, select 12/22, and
2:00 PM, and click OK.
For Files of type, verify that JPEG Files is selected, and click Save.
456
Presentation Views
12
In this tutorial, you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views.
Whether the audience is the general contractor, a consultant, an outside reviewer, or the client, tailoring the presentation
is just as important as the accuracy of the content. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number, length, type,
and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. Other tools in the software, however, help to explain the
subjective complexity of the work, transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project.
Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. They include rendering, advanced model
graphics, linework, and section boxes. When organizing presentation graphics, you can choose between realism and
stylistics. In this series of exercises, you explore the stylistic approach. For the realistic approach, use the tutorials for the
rendering features of Revit Architecture, Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391.
In this tutorial, you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. The analytique is a classic
Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among
plans, sections, elevations, and details. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of
a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built
building model, Co-house, you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.
457
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Cohouse.rvt.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Cnst, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Second Floor Plan, and click OK.
Modify visibility/graphics
4 Click View menu Visibility/Graphics.
TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active, exit the menu, click in the drawing area, and click
View menu Visibility/Graphics again.
5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show
annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all tags, dimensions, sections, elevations, and other annotations
in this view.
6 Click the Model Categories tab.
7 Under Visibility, expand the Stairs category, and clear DOWN Text, Down Arrow, UP Text, and
Up Arrow.
NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.
8 Click OK.
No annotations display in the view.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Modify advanced model graphics settings
1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view, double-click it in the
Project Browser.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Hidden Line.
3 On the View Control Bar, click
Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view.
4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, specify the following:
5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Still tab, select Sun and Shadow Settings.
6 Under Settings, select By Date, Time and Place.
7 For Place, click
Within a project, you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. At that place,
you can create, modify, and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype.
8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click the Place tab.
9 For City, select Boston, MA, and click OK.
NOTE For this step, you can select any city. If you select a different city, however, most of the images
in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen.
10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, for Date and Time, specify 10/27, 1:00 PM.
11 Select Ground Plane at Level, and select 1st Flr. Cnst.
This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.
12 Click OK.
13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, click OK.
Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This gives the plan depth and
creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.
Turn off the ground plane shadows
14 On the View Control Bar, click
15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, for Sun Position, click
16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, under Settings, clear Ground Plane at Level, and click
OK.
This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.
17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, click OK.
Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique, you need to create a new viewport
type that does not display the view title.
Create a new viewport type
8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet.
9 On the Options Bar, click
For this analytique, you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish
this, you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view.
Create a solid fill background for contrast
15 Right-click the viewport, and click Activate View.
This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet.
16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
You enter sketch mode where you define the line type, fill properties, and the boundary of the
region.
17 In the Type Selector, select Invisible lines.
18 On the Options Bar, click
19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. The space between the perimeter of the building
model and each line should be equidistant.
Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region, you must define the inner
perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model.
20 On the Options Bar, click
21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model, draw a chain of lines around the exterior
face of the building model as shown. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes.
TIP Use care when sketching this chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details, and
you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. If necessary, use the Trim tool to
clean up gaps or overlapping intersections.
TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines, create the interior chain of lines using Medium
or Wide lines. When you finish drawing the chain, select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the
line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector.
22 On the Design Bar, click Region Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
27 In the Fill Patterns dialog, under Name, scroll down, select Solid fill, and click OK.
28 In the Type Properties dialog, verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black, and
click OK.
29 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Copy and rename the elevation view
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) Elevations, right-click South, and click Duplicate
View Duplicate.
A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.
2 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click Copy of South, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation South Elevation, and click OK.
Modify visibility/graphic overrides
4 Click View menu Visibility/Graphics.
TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active, exit the menu, click in the drawing area, and click
View menu Visibility/Graphics again.
5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, on the Model Categories tab, under Visibility, click
in the Walls row. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls, click Override.
6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, under Pattern Overrides, clear Visible, and click OK.
This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.
7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, under Visibility, scroll up, expand the Doors category,
and clear Elevation Swing.
8 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.
9 Click OK.
Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view.
12 Under Shadow, select Cast Shadows.
13 For Contrast, specify 35.
14 For Sun Position, click
Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Add a view to the sheet
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all) Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Presentation.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Add View.
3 In the Views dialog, select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation, and click Add View to Sheet.
4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.
TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.
6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the
presentation floor plan.
7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Add a section in a plan view
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
3 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1: 100.
TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.
4 Add the section shown below.
The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of
the building (lower wall). Adjust the controls to modify the extents, and use the flip arrows if
necessary.
To fit correctly in the analytique, this view needs to be rotated 180. To accomplish this, you
will create a callout around the building model in the section view.
6 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
7 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1 : 100.
8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view, as shown.
Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head
so you can see it easily.
Casework
Ceilings
Furniture
Lighting Fixtures
Specialty Equipment
19 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.
20 Click OK.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Add shadows to the section view
1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view, in the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout
1), double-click Presentation Section 2.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Hidden Line.
3 On the View Control Bar, click
Click Apply.
The shadows do not offer much contrast.
TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view.
In the steps that follow, you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the
presentation view.
Click OK.
TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the
placement of the section line in the previous exercise.
Apply silhouette edges
9 On the View Control Bar, click
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, for Silhouette style, select Silhouette Edges,
and click OK.
NOTE The line style, Silhouette Edges, was added to this training file for training purposes. You can
modify this line style by clicking Settings menu Line Styles.
Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model.
TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges.
11 Click File menu Save.
12 Proceed with the next exercise, Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Add the view to the presentation sheet
1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Presentation.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Add View.
3 In the Views dialog, select Section: Presentation Section 2, and click Add View to Sheet.
4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown, and click to place the selected view.
The section needs to be rotated 180. In the steps that follow, you accomplish this by rotating
the callout in the section view.
Rotate the callout
7 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Section 2.
8 Select the callout that you added previously.
(Rotate).
To rotate an object, you click to specify the start radius, move the cursor in the direction of the
rotation, and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius.
10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Using a clock as a reference, specify 3 oclock
as the rotation start point.
11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise, enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation,
and press Enter.
The callout rotates 180. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building
model.
12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building
model as shown.
14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport, and drag it up and to the left as shown.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Create a presentation view template
1 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Section 2.
2 Click View menu Create View Template from View.
3 In the New View Template dialog, enter Presentation, and click OK.
4 In the View Templates dialog, click OK.
Create a new presentation view
5 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), right-click Section 1, and click Duplicate
View Duplicate.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), right-click Copy of Section 1, and click Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Section 1, and click OK.
Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique, you can simply apply
the presentation view template.
9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under Names, select Presentation, and click OK.
The furniture, lighting fixtures, annotations, and elevation swings no longer display.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Create a callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), double-click Section 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.
After you add the callout, click Modify, select the callout, and modify its boundaries and the
location of the callout head, as shown.
4 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), right-click Callout of Section 1, and click
Rename.
5 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Callout, and click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Callout.
7 Select the crop region, and adjust the bottom to create a small gap, as shown.
This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.
Click OK.
NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet, activate the viewport, turn
on the crop region from the view properties dialog, and make adjustments as necessary. When
finished, hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport.
The composition set for the analytique is now complete. In the steps that follow, you add a
heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. Although you can use several methods to create
these areas of contrast, the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout.
Apply filled regions to the presentation callout
21 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Callout.
22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
23 On the Design Bar, click Region Properties.
24 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
26 In the Fill Patterns dialog, select Solid fill, and click OK 3 times.
27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar, sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof
shown below. When you are finished, on the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. You do not have to replicate
the image exactly. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document
as a stylized representation of the architectural forms.
34 Select the crop region, and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region
displays.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Create a southwest isometric view
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Isometric.
Click OK.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, for Silhouette style, select Silhouette Edges,
and click OK.
TIP Notice the rotation symbol. You can use this to rotate the section box.
20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box, and drag the plane downward until it cuts
halfway through the third floor, as shown.
When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar.
Before turning off the visibility of the section box, make a copy of the view.
21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric 2, and click Duplicate
View Duplicate.
22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Copy of Isometric 2, and click Rename.
23 In the Rename View dialog, enter Isometric 3, and click OK.
24 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Isometric 2.
25 To hide the section box, click View menu Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories
tab, clear Section Boxes, and click OK.
The section box no longer displays.
Modify the section box of Isometric 3
26 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Isometric 3.
27 Select the section box.
28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box, and drag the plane downward until it cuts
halfway through the first floor as shown.
When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar.
NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box, the stairs and railings
may display. If desired, you can adjust the plane location, or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs
using the Visibility/Graphics dialog.
29 To hide the section box, click View menu Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories
tab, clear Section Boxes, and click OK.
Next, you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show
the continual erosion of the structure.
Add isometric views to the presentation sheet
30 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Presentation.
31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown.
In the Type Selector, select Viewport : Presentation.
32 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. In the
Type Selector, select Viewport : Presentation.
33 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. In the
Type Selector, select Viewport : Presentation.
The filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Create a perspective view
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location, then you specify the eye
direction and range.
3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown, and specify the range and
direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.
4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it.
8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, for Name, select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric,
and click OK.
9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog, for Silhouette style, select Silhouette Edges,
and click OK.
13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following
image. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well.
19 To hide the section box, click View menu Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories
tab, clear Section Boxes, and click OK.
505
506
13
The ability to import SketchUp files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into
the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been
imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components.
In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.
After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of
the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.
507
You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units
(Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that
information.
Click Open.
18 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510.
The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces
to and from the selection.
again
7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is
selected.
This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.
8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.
17 Click
to turn off the mass visibility in the view, and display only the
24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below.
26 Click
31 Using the same technique, create the 2 curtain systems shown below.
43 Click
Below the right corner of the view, specify a point to place the camera.
In the far left corner of the building that you created, specify a point for the camera target,
as shown.
The perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red
and its grips display.
47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building, and click in the
drawing area to hide the grips.
to view only the walls, roofs, and curtain systems that make up
You may need to resize the view again. Click the frame to display its grips.
Click OK.
52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the
view.
Modify the roofs
53 On the Views toolbar, click
54 Select each roof to display its grips, and move the roof edges as shown below.
522
523
524
Curtain Systems
14
Curtain systems are not walls, and they are not windows. Like walls, they can define space and separate the exterior from
the interior. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like windows, they can usually
include mullions and have glazed panels. Unlike windows, curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit.
A typical curtain system comprises a wall, panel, grid lines, and mullions, and you can change these elements individually.
This affects the entire curtain system. For example, to resize the system, you need to change the length of the wall. To
switch panel types, you need to select a panel. To change grids, you select the grid.
You can add curtain systems with the wall command, or you can use a specific curtain system command.
Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you create a curtain system using the wall command. This type of curtain system is also
referred to as a curtain wall.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls.rvt.
525
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) Floor Plans, and double-click Ground Floor.
2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor.
6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor, and finish at the outside face of the exterior
wall as shown.
7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) 3D Views, and double-click Southeast Isometric.
9 Click View menu Orient Northeast.
10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.
(Properties).
Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls:
base constraint, top constraint, top and base attachments, and room bounding.
You want the curtain system to attach to the roof.
12 In the Element Properties dialog:
Click OK.
The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.
13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel; you are going to subdivide the panel into several
smaller panels, using curtain grids.
24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line.
25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
26 While pressing CTRL, select the 3 grid lines you just placed.
27 Click Edit menu Copy to Clipboard, or press CTRL + C on the keyboard.
28 Click Edit menu Paste Aligned Select Levels by Name.
29 In the Select Levels dialog, while pressing CTRL, select SECOND FLOOR, THIRD FLOOR, FOURTH
FLOOR, FIFTH FLOOR, SIXTH FLOOR, and SEVENTH FLOOR, and click OK.
The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels.
Next, you add a doorway to the curtain system. Instead of using the Door command, you set
up a doorway on a curtain panel, and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door
panel.
Adding the doorway
34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view.
35 Select the left vertical grid line, and on the Options Bar, click Add or Remove Segments.
You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them.
36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line, and then select the segment above it.
The segment line style changes to dashed.
38 Using the same method, remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment
removed in the previous step.
TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions.
43 Delete the dimensions.
44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays, click OK to leave the curtain
grids constrained.
You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.
45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.
46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar.
You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.
47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. The line style changes from dashed
to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels.
Use the following image as a guide.
TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. To get the horizontal
grid to display between the vertical grids, click once to the right of the long grid and then click once
to the left of it.
48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid), click in any white space to exit the
editor.
Next, you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors.
49 Click File menu Load From Library Load Family.
50 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl.rfa.
51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. Watch the Status Bar
to be sure you are highlighting the panel.
52 On the Type Selector, click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door.
The panel changes to a double door.
53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door.
54 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
These panels schedule as doors, not as curtain panels. They are part of the curtain panel category.
55 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view
door swings of the curtain wall doors.
Now, on the new curtain system you added, you replace some of the transparent panels with
solid ones.
56 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Entrance Elevation.
57 On the View Control Bar, click
view.
62 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel.
The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Thickness
specifies the depth of the panel, and Material specifies the shading and patterning.
63 Click OK twice.
64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels.
65 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
The glazed panels display in blue, and the solid panels display in white.
68 On the File menu, click Save As. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.rvt.
This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion.
2 On the Options Bar, select Grid Line Segment.
3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right
set of doors.
Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them; however, there are a few that you do not
want, so you remove them next. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary, because
their width reduces the size of the doors.
Removing mullions
8 Zoom in to the set of doors.
9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, clickModify.
10 Delete the mullions below them.
Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. You are going to change some mullion joins.
Changing mullion joins
11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Hidden Line.
12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.
The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above.
TIP After selecting the vertical mullion, you can also right-click, and click Join Conditions Break at
Join to break the mullion at both joins.
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
16 In the Project Browser, double-click Southeast Isometric.
17 Save the file.
This completes the exercise for adding mullions.
This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. You learned how to create a basic curtain
wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels.
Finally, you learned how to add mullions and change their joins.
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR.
2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
4 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.
5 Click
Click OK.
8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall.
The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Next,
you place grids on the system. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. You are
going to use one of these snaps points.
11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.
12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you
are at the midpoint.
13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Divide the halves into quarters,
eighths, and then sixteenths.
14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click East.
15 Zoom in to the cylinder, and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain
grids. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.
1 Click File menu New Family.
2 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\Metric
Curtain Wall Panel.rft.
3 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form Solid Extrusion.
5 On the Design Bar, click Lines, and on the Options Bar, for Depth, enter 100.
6 On the Options Bar, click
7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference
line intersection.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data Subcategory, select Glass, and click OK.
11 On the Design Bar, click Model Lines.
12 On the Options Bar, clear Chain, and click
13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion.
(Default 3D View).
(SteeringWheels).
26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.
The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click East.
2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion.
3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel, except at the GROUND FLOOR
level.
For vertical mullions, you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.
Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor
4 Click File menu New Family.
5 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\Metric
Profile.rft.
6 Click Settings menu Family Category and Parameters.
7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog, for Profile Usage, select Mullion, and click OK.
8 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
9 On the Options Bar:
Click
(Polygon).
10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting
point. Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points
are in the same location.
(SteeringWheels).
29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.
30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion.
31 Click
You have placed more mullions than you want, so you remove the unwanted ones.
41 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR.
42 Highlight a mullion in the arc, right-click, and click Select Mullions On Gridline.
43 Press DELETE.
This completes the exercise for adding mullions, as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system.
In this lesson, you learned to create a curved curtain system, make custom curtain panels and mullions, and
then apply those custom elements to the system.
Sloped Glazings
Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click TOP OF ROOF.
2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
4 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope.
6 Select the inside faces of the base walls.
TIP To chain select all the walls, place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls, and press
TAB. All the inside faces highlight, and you can click to select them all.
Click OK.
Storefront System
In this exercise, you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR.
2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model.
You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right
inside this wall.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
4 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront.
5 On the Options Bar, select Unconnected for Height, and enter 2400.
6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.
7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.
The curtain wall cuts the original wall.
8 Click the temporary dimension, enter 10200 mm, and press ENTER.
This specifies an exact length for the wall.
9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric.
11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.
The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout, which is specified in the type. To see how
the grid layout is defined, you can look at the properties of the storefront wall.
12 Select the storefront wall, and click
The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout.
Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading, you find Number, Justification, Angle, and Offset. You
see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, the Number
is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies
the vertical spacing at the beginning, center, or end. By setting the Angle value, you are rotating
the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts
from the justification point. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the
perpendicular direction. For more information about these curtain wall parameters, see the Revit
Architecture help.
15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall, for Vertical Grid Pattern Angle, enter 45 and
for Horizontal Grid Pattern Angle, enter 15.
16 Click OK.
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric.
2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Hidden Line.
4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain System Curtain System by Lines.
5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab, making sure Lines : Model Lines :
Line is highlighted.
Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to
select the line if it does not immediately highlight.
Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system.
11 Click OK.
Next, you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.
NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system, but now that you have created
a ruled curtain system, you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want.
12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.
13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps, place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves,
quarters, and then eighths.
This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system.
14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves,
quarters, and then eighths.
Finally, you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels.
15 Highlight a top level glazed panel, right-click, and click Select Panels Along Grid 2.
16 In the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid.
17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.
556
15
Roofs
In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In addition, you learn how to
add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs that you create.
Creating Roofs
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, mansard, and
low sloped roofs. In this lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.
You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway.
Before you can sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do
not need to create the work plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Roofs.rvt.
557
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Extrusion.
3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to
select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.
6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK.
The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.
Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help
determine key points on the profile sketch.
7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.
TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially, you can place it in the
general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane
is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. To change where the
temporary dimension is measured from (face, centerline, and so on), click the blue square on the
witness line.
9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.
10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.
The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.
Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.
Next, use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to
the exterior walls.
17 On the Tools toolbar, click
(Join/Unjoin Roof).
18 Select the edge of the roof, and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof
to the garage wall.
Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior
wall of the house that joins the breezeway.
19 On the Tools toolbar, click
(Join/Unjoin Roof).
20 Select the breezeway roof edge, press TAB, and then select the exterior face of the wall.
The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof, so you next attach the breezeway walls to the
breezeway roof.
21 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections (Type 1), and double-click Section
1.
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
23 Select one of the breezeway walls, press CTRL, and select the second wall.
24 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.
25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope
lines to define the roof gable ends.
To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch, you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope
lines.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level, and click Yes.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Garage Roof.
7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed
blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.
Next, edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.
10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
11 Press CTRL, select both slope definition lines, and on the Options Bar, click
(Properties).
The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default, the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a
1000 mm run.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the
roof slope, and click OK.
13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
14 When you see the informational dialog, click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls
to the roof.
15 On the View toolbar, click
the model.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on
page 565.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. After you define
the roof slope lines and complete the footprint, you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.
When you complete the roof, the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, clear Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step.
4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls, press TAB, and then verify that a dashed blue line
displays to the exterior side of the walls.
(Rectangle).
9 Using automatic snaps, sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney
face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face.
10 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.
Next, add new slope lines to the roof.
11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
12 Select the uppermost horizontal line.
13 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Verify that
a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select
the walls.
Next, close the roof sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the
roof. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other.
6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
7 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and click
(Pick Lines).
8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building, using the following
illustration for guidance.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must
trim these lines to create a valid sketch.
9 On the Tools toolbar, click
(Trim/Extend).
10 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.
11 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical slope definition line, and then specify a
point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.
Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.
12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.
21 Click
(SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support
the hip roof.
22 Using the same method that you used previously, join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press
and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.
Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next, use the Join
Roof command to fix the roof.
(Join/Unjoin Roof).
24 Select the edge of the hip roof, and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.
25 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
4 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and enter 300 for Overhang.
5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way, press TAB, and then
click to select all three of the entry way walls.
Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to
select the walls.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must
trim these lines to create a valid sketch.
8 On the Tools toolbar, click
(Trim/Extend).
9 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.
10 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical roof line, and then select a point near the
midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Make sure you select the segment
on the side that you want to keep.
11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.
14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope, and press ENTER.
21 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.
8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed
roof sketch.
Next, change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines
slope.
11 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.
12 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope.
Next, add two new slope arrows.
13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Slope Arrow.
14 On the Options Bar, verify
(Draw) is selected.
15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line:
Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the
location of the slope arrow tail.
Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays, and then select it to specify
the location of the slope arrow head.
(Properties).
NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof, use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall
to the roof.
23 Proceed to the next exercise, Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574.
4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
6 With the two gable end lines selected, on the Options Bar, click
(Properties).
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 800 mm for Rise/1000, and click OK.
8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Align Eaves.
The eave lines display with a dimension. This dimension is the height of the eave measured
from the sketch plane.
9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. When aligning eaves, you must select one
eave to use to align both eaves.
Next, select a method to align the eaves.
10 On the Options Bar, select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to
match the eave height of the first eave.
11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.
Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with
a unique name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click North.
Notice the model has four defined levels:
In the next steps, you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
3 Select the roof and, on the Options Bar, click
(Properties).
4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.
5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.
Next, create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
10 On the Options Bar, click
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, enter 750 mm for Rise/1000, and click OK.
16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
18 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with
a unique name.
19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
20 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof.rvt.
NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.
2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
4 On the Options Bar, verify that Defines slope is not selected, and that Overhang is 0' 0''.
5 In the drawing area, select the interior face of the curved wall on the right.
6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of
the arc wall at the entry.
Because the walls are not continuous, you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. Instead
you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop
sketch.
(Trim/Extend).
You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope
independently.
18 Move the cursor down, and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line
You create a split line vertically down the center.
19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line, move the cursor horizontally to the left, and select a
point on the opposite roof line.
20 Using the same method, add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the
arc.
The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Next, you begin to shape the slab by adding points for
the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges.
(Add points).
(Modify Sub-Elements).
You modify the points individually. You could also select multiple points and change them all
at once from the Options Bar.
24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof, for the dimension, enter -2'', and press
ENTER.
The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane.
25 Using the same method, specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.
The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.
(Modify Sub-Elements).
27 Press and hold CTRL, and select all of the roof edges, including the interior edges of the roof
regions, as shown:
28 On the Options Bar, for Elevation, enter 4'', and press ENTER.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the
slab.
(Properties).
The slab has not responded exactly as intended. The entire slab is sloped. In some cases this
type of slope is desired, but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. You
edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result.
37 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with
a unique name.
38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
39 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits on page 586.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Condominium.rvt.
1 Click File menu Load From Library Load Family.
2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs.
3 Press CTRL, select M_Fascia-Built-Up.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove.rfa, and click Open.
4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep Roof Fascia.
5 On the Options Bar, click
(Properties).
6 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.
7 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
8 In the Name dialog, enter Built-up Fascia, and click OK.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38
x 286 for Profile, and click OK twice.
10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof.
12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.
Creating Gutters
In this exercise, you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a
condominium building model.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep Roof Gutter.
2 On the Options Bar, click
(Properties).
8 In the Materials dialog, select Metal-Aluminum for Name, and click OK three times.
9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.
11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Soffits on page 590.
Creating Soffits
In this exercise, you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the
condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Roof.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof Soffit.
3 On the Design Bar, click Pick Roofs.
9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with
a unique name.
10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Area Analysis
16
In this tutorial, you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. The first step in area
analysis is the definition of area schemes. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. You can
edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Each area
scheme can have multiple area plans. Finally, you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes
and plans.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Area.rvt.
NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. If you are using metric units, your values will be different.
Click OK.
593
Click OK.
Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in
office buildings.
Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme, it is not necessary
in this exercise.
8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog, click the Room Calculations tab.
You can specify the height where the room area is calculated.
At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.
You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations, as well as selecting
whether to have room volumes calculated automatically.
9 Click Cancel.
Click OK.
12 When the informational dialog displays, click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically.
When you select Yes in this dialog, area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior
walls of the building model, forming a closed loop. If you select No, you must manually add
these boundary lines.
13 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross
Building). Expand Area Plans (Gross Building), and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active
view.
14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Area.
NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. The Area Tag command is used to
tag existing areas. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. To modify the area, you
must select one of the reference lines, rather than the area tag. The area reference lines are for design
purposes only and do not print.
15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag.
NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. A room tag measures the
area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area
Settings.
Next, you create a new area plan for rentable space. You add and use area boundary lines to
define the office areas, common areas, and store area.
Create a rentable area scheme and plan
16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Area Plan.
17 In the New Area Plan dialog, do the following:
Click OK.
NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Although the rule for
these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall, if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall
height, the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass.
Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Expand Area Plans (Rentable),
and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.
19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model.
Add area boundary lines
20 On the Design Bar, click Area Boundary.
21 On the Options Bar, verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected.
When you add area boundary lines, you can either draw them or pick them. When you pick
the walls, you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust
to the area type. If you do not select this option, the area boundary lines do not update
automatically.
22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time.
Click OK.
Click OK.
34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps, add an area in the common space to the right
of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall.
In the Element Properties dialog, do the following:
Click OK.
35 Add an area to the building model core, enter Core for Name, and select Major Vertical
Penetration for Area Type.
36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Name the areas
Tenant 3 and Tenant 4, and select Store Area for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper
right, and Tenant 4 in the lower right.
Notice that within the two store areas, the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area
type.
3 When the dialog displays, click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.
9 Click OK.
The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within
the schedule.
Massing
17
You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail
usually found in a project. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model
shell. At any time, you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls, floors, curtain systems,
and roofs. After creating mass floors, you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design.
After you make building elements, you can specify the view to display massing elements, building elements, or both.
Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. If you modify a massing face, you then need to
update the building face.
In this tutorial, you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. You use mass floors
to divide the mass at each level of the building model. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze
floor area, volume, and perimeter information. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model, you
convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You then modify the building model in both the massing view
and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project.
603
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Massing_Start.rvt.
6 On the Sketch Design Bar, click Lines, and on the Options Bar, click
(Line).
10 In the Materials dialog, for Name, select Mass (Opaque), and click OK.
11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Extrusion End, enter 25000, and click
OK.
12 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
13 On the View toolbar, click
(Default 3D View).
(Pick Lines).
23 In the Materials dialog, for Name, select Mass (Transparent), and click OK.
24 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Extrusion Start, enter 25000, for Extrusion
End, enter 27500, and click OK.
25 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
26 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), double-click {3D} to see the results.
The second form is on top of the first form.
(Pick Lines).
Next, you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc.
35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown, and click to select the line start
point.
The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint.
TIP If you do not see this option, click the arrow next to the drawing options, and click Arc passing
through three points from the menu.
38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and delete the vertical construction line.
40 Select the arc and the horizontal line.
41 On the Edit toolbar, click
(Move).
42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.
43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as
shown.
(Line).
(Default 3D View).
54 Proceed to the next exercise, Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model
on page 610.
In this exercise, you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building
model.
In the next exercise, you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_Massing_Start.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 In the drawing area, select the mass.
5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted, and
place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right.
6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane.
7 Using the same technique, place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right, as
shown.
When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow, you specify the intersection of the
reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. These reference planes
act primarily as sketching aids.
Sketch extrusion voids
8 On the Design Bar, click Void Form Void Extrusion.
9 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
10 On the Options Bar, click
NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode, on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics
Style Hidden Line.
11 Enter SI for intersection snap, and sketch the first void extrusion as shown.
(Default 3D View).
In this exercise, you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, m_Massing_Start.rvt.
Sketch a 2D path
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form Solid Swept Blend.
3 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path, and click Lines.
4 On the Options Bar, click
Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of
the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. The only way to align these elements is
visually.
Sketch profile 1
(Default 3D View).
From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend.
8 On the Design Bar, click Profile 1.
9 On the Options Bar, verify that <By Sketch> is selected, and click Edit.
10 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
11 On the Options Bar, click
(Rectangle).
12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle, and sketch a
6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass, as shown.
(Align).
14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge, and press ESC.
Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc, and
sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. (The size of the rectangle is not important because
you align it to the mass edges.)
Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass.
Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion, as shown:
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box.rfa.
5 Click New, and for Name, enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm, and click OK.
6 For Width, enter 68000 mm, for Height, enter 18000 mm, for Depth, enter 9000 mm, and click
Apply.
7 Click New, and for Name, enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm, and click OK.
8 For Width, enter 46000mm, for Height, enter 11000 mm, for Depth, enter 6000 mm, and click
Apply.
9 Click OK.
10 Click File menu Save As.
11 Save the file as Box-Training.rfa.
In this exercise, you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.rvt.
(Element Properties).
12 In the Element Properties dialog, for the Material parameter, specify Mass (Transparent), and
click OK twice.
13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
14 In the Type Selector, select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm.
15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family, as shown.
(Element Properties).
18 In the Element Properties dialog, for the Material parameter, specify Mass (Opaque), and click
OK twice.
19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
20 In the Type Selector, select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500.
21 On the Options Bar, select Rotate after placement.
22 Place the cursor in the drawing area, and click to place the mass.
23 On the Options Bar, enter 90 for Angle.
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
25 In the drawing area, select the triangle, and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place
the triangle as shown.
(Element Properties).
27 In the Element Properties dialog, for the Material parameter, specify Mass (Transparent), and
click OK twice.
28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
29 In the Type Selector, select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.
30 Place the box mass family as shown.
(Element Properties).
32 In the Element Properties dialog, for the Material parameter, specify Mass (Opaque), and click
OK twice.
33 On the View toolbar, click
(Default 3D View).
Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. In the next exercise,
you join these mass elements.
In this exercise, you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. You
also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model.
Training File
Join geometry
1 On the View toolbar, click
(Default 3D View).
(Join Geometry).
NOTE When you join geometry, the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently
selected mass element.
3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown.
(Mirror).
(Draw).
9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box, enter SM, and snap to the midpoint
of the edge.
10 Click to select the mirror axis start point.
11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection, as shown.
TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally.
Join geometry
13 On the View toolbar, click
(Default 3D View).
(Join Geometry).
15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first, and
then select the triangle.
16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.
17 Press ESC to see the result.
In this exercise, you joined mass elements together. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the
subsequently selected mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its
geometry with that of another element.
Training File
4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog, select Sloped (primary), clear Curved, and click OK.
5 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
Place semi barrel vaults
6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
7 In the Type Selector, select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500.
8 On the Options Bar, select Rotate after placement.
9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass.
10 On the Options Bar, for Angle, enter 90.
11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown.
TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely.
(Element Properties).
15 In the Element Properties dialog, for the Material parameter, specify Mass (Transparent), and
click OK twice.
Place arc dome mass elements
16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
17 In the Type Selector, select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H.
18 Place 3 arc domes as shown.
TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes.
(Element Properties).
21 In the Element Properties dialog, for the Material parameter, specify Mass (Transparent), and
click OK twice.
22 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Elevations, double-click North.
23 On the View Control Bar, Model Graphics Style Wireframe.
24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown.
27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog, select Curved, clear Sloped, and click OK.
28 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.
You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. Because it is likely that
your client prefers the design option with curved shapes, you can make it the primary option.
32 On the Design Options toolbar, click
(Design Options).
33 In the Design Options dialog, select Curved and, under Option, click Make Primary.
34 Close the warning that displays, and click Close.
35 On the File menu, click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options.rvt.
In this exercise, you placed mass elements into Design Options. You then switched between different design
options to get different versions of the design.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), double-click {3D}.
2 On the View toolbar, click
7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.
8 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 3.
9 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
10 Select all the faces shown in red.
NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed, alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap, ignore the
warning and continue selecting wall faces.
11 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 5.
12 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
15 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
16 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront.
17 Select the 3 faces shown in red.
You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. If desired, you can select the overlapping
curtain wall, and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. You can then edit the profile to clean up
the overlapping geometry.
19 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 9.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Wireframe.
21 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
22 Select all the faces shown in red.
In this exercise, you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls.
Training File
Creating floors
5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1.
6 On the Options Bar, click Mass Floors.
7 In the Mass Floors dialog, select all levels, and click OK.
8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
14 On the Options Bar, clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel
elements in the next step).
15 Press CTRL, and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x
18000 mm box mass element as shown.
NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. The box
mass is the long box element in the middle of the model.
In this exercise, you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. Now that the floor
areas have been added to the mass objects, schedules can be created using the mass floors.
Training File
Usage
You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage
to the different masses.
5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mass: Family and Type.
6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected, and click OK.
The Mass Floor Schedule displays.
7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed.
NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column
to fit the text.
9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule, according to the following
guidelines:
NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule, you can select it from the drop-down list for
subsequent entries.
Mass Family
Usage
Retail
Mass Family
Usage
Atrium
Atrium
Mass 1: Mass 1
Hotel
Atrium
15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Usage, for Then by, select Level, and select
Grand totals.
16 On the Formatting tab, under Fields, select Floor Area, for Field formatting, select Calculate
totals, and click OK.
17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit.
18 On the Filter tab, for Filter by, select Usage, and in the field below, enter Hotel.
You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently.
19 Click OK twice.
20 Click in the title of the schedule, and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule.
In this exercise, you created mass floor schedules. The mass floor schedules list, by level, the floor area, floor
perimeter, and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model.
Training File
Create roofs
2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face.
3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.
8 Using the method you just learned, create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass.
Training File
7 Using the same method, create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.
8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected, select the blended form on the in-place
mass.
Training File
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
3 On the Model Categories tab, clear Curtain Panels, Curtain Systems, Floors, Roofs, and Walls,
and then click OK.
Next, you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.
4 Select the box mass family as shown, and click
(Element Properties).
5 In the Element Properties dialog, for Width, enter 30000, and click OK.
9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.
The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps, you remake
several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family.
11 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
12 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Wireframe.
13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown.
TIP To select the curtain wall, press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting
the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. Also, remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that
are overlapping here; you want to select the smaller one.
(Default 3D View).
20 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.
Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements.
In this exercise, you changed the size of an existing mass family. You then modified building elements to
resize with the new mass family.
In this exercise, you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass
model.
This concludes the massing tutorial. If desired, you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture
modeling components, such as columns and an extruded roof, to the building shell. You might create the
model shown.
652
Grouping
18
Using the grouping functionality in Revit Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts
common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the
modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the
building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications.
You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then
you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically
included in the host group.
Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project,
or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also
gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because
existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office
can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.
653
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.rvt.
NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.
2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor
plan.
3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen.
(Group).
5 In the Create Model Group dialog, enter Typical Kitchen, and click OK.
The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.
(Mirror).
17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell, and on the Edit toolbar, click
(Rotate).
19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.
NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images, select the group and
use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.
Modifying a Group
In this exercise, you make changes to an instance of a group. When you finish editing, all instances of the
same group in the drawing are updated.
Training File
Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise,
m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.
Modify visibility of elements in a group
1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.
2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen, press TAB to highlight the wall, and
click to select it.
3 Click
This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.
NOTE To display an excluded element, select the element, and click
member to group instance.).
4 Move the cursor over the door, press TAB, and click to select the door.
5 Click
6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall, press TAB, and click to select the wall.
7 Click
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, select Opening Wall Opening.
23 In the drawing area, select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top.
24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall, move the cursor up, and click near the top corner of
the wall to create an opening.
(Element Properties).
27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Unconnected Height, enter 2134.
28 For Base Offset, enter 1000, and click OK.
29 On the group editor toolbar, click Finish.
All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change.
Nesting Groups
In this exercise, you add the Typical Kitchen group, created in an earlier lesson, and the wall and folding
doors for the closet, to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom
unit group, which acts as the host. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit, all instances of the
host group are updated to contain the nested group.
Training File
Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise,
m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.
Add elements to an existing group
1 If necessary, in the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click First Floor.
2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.
(Add to Group).
6 Press TAB, select the wall between the folding doors, and each of the bifold doors.
5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.
6 Move the cursor down and to the left, and select a point below the left elevator.
(Group).
15 In the Create Detail Group dialog, enter Elevator Lobby Tile, and click OK.
16 In the drawing area, select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.
17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft, as shown.
manner that a drawing component can be added; you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2
Bedroom Unit group.
Training File
Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise,
m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.
Place door tags
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click First Floor.
2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag By Category.
3 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit, as shown.
NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.
(Filter Selection).
8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Door Tags, and click OK.
9 On the Edit toolbar, click
(Group).
10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog, for Attached Detail Group Name,
enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags, and click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit, and view that Floor Plan: 2
Bedroom Door Tags is attached.
Place a detail group in another group instance
12 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Second Floor.
Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise,
m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.
Save a group to a library
1 In the Project Browser, under Groups\Model, right-click 2 Bedroom Unit, and click Save Group.
2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog, click Desktop.
3 For File name, verify that Same as group name is selected, and click Save.
You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project, or a Revit family
file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. In this case, the file is saved as a Revit project
file (RVT).
Load the group in a new project
4 Click File menu New Project.
5 In the New Project dialog, accept the default template file, for Create new, verify that Project is
selected, and click OK.
6 Click File menu Load from Library Load File as Group.
7 In the Load File as Group dialog, browse to the Desktop, select 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt, and click
Open.
8 In the Duplicate Types dialog, click OK.
A warning dialog displays, explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the
new project will be used.
Place an instance of the loaded group
9 In the Project Browser, expand Groups, and expand Model.
10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit, and click Create Instance.
11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance.
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
19
Site
In this tutorial, you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project.
677
Creating a Toposurface
In this exercise, you create a toposurface using two different methods. Using the first method, you create a
toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. In the second part of this exercise, you
import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_First_Project.rvt.
This project file was created using the default metric template.
6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference.
Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. A toposurface
must have at least three elevation points.
7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. The circle
should be approximately 55000 mm wide.
10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm, 12000mm, 15000mm, and 18000mm absolute elevations.
Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. Use the following
illustration as a reference.
(Default 3D View).
15 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
16 On the View toolbar, click
to view it at various angles.
to delete it.
18 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click
South.
Before importing the contour data, modify the level names and elevations.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head, click the elevation value, enter 1000mm, and press ENTER.
21 Click the Level 2 text, rename the level Basement, and press ENTER.
22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views, click Yes.
23 Click the Level 1 text, rename the level Base Site Elevation, and press ENTER.
Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views.
24 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
25 Click File menu Import/Link CAD Formats.
26 In the Import/Link dialog:
Click Open.
You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import.
27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog, clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark, and
click OK.
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within
the view.
29 Select the imported topography.
Until it is exploded, it is considered an import symbol.
30 On the Edit menu, click Pin Position.
This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved.
When you select the import symbol, you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the
elevation points.
38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog, clear C_INDX, and click OK.
(Default 3D View).
This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. If you
have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site-in progress.rvt.
Sketch property lines
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Property Line.
3 In the Property Line Creation dialog, select Create property lines by sketching, and click OK.
4 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar, sketch the shape shown in the following
illustration. Although you can use your preferred sketching method, you can quickly create the
shape by doing the following:
Click Modify.
Using the 3-point Arc tool, add an arc line on the right.
NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.
6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.
7 Move the cursor over the property lines and, when they highlight, select the lines.
8 On the Options Bar, select Edit Table.
A warning dialog is displayed, informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table
cannot be undone.
9 In the warning dialog, click OK.
10 In the Property Lines dialog, click OK.
NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location
of your sketch.
Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings
11 Select the property lines and, on the Standard toolbar, click
to delete them.
14 In the Property Lines dialog, click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data.
15 Starting in Row #1, enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4:
100000 S 00'0" E
80000 N 900'0" W
100000 N 00'0" E
80000 N 900'0" E
Notice that after you complete the last line, the distance that displayed under From last to first
point now displays Closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines. If the gap is not
closed, review your data entry and make necessary corrections.
16 Click OK.
The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.
17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference,
click to place the property lines.
20 Click Load.
21 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag.rfa.
22 In the Tags dialog, notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments, and click OK.
Before adding property line segment tags, the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be
turned off. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours, the original
DWG file remains visible in the view.
23 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Imported Categories tab.
25 Under Visibility, clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site.dwg and click OK.
26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag By Category.
NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible, right-click in the Design Bar, and click
Drafting.
27 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. When the tag displays
at the tip of the cursor, click to place it.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site-in progress.rvt.
Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation
1 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Wireframe.
2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.
3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog, scroll down the list of categories and
expand Topography.
4 Under Modify Subcategories, click New.
5 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter the name Working Contour, for Subcategory, select
Topography, and click OK.
In the Object Styles dialog, the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography.
6 In the Object Styles dialog, specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory:
7 Click OK.
Modify site settings
8 On the Settings menu, click Site Settings.
9 In the Site Settings dialog, under Contour Line Display, specify an interval of 1000mm passing
through elevation 0.0mm.
10 Under Additional Contours, specify the following values:
11 Click OK.
The object style subcategory, Working Contour, displays on the topography only at the elevation
you specified.
12 Click File menu Close. Click Yes when prompted to save changes.
The next exercise requires a new training file.
13 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690.
In this exercise, you created a new object style subcategory for topography. You then modified the site setting
to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory.
In the next exercise, you create topographic subregions to define roads, parking areas, and islands.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Site.rvt.
NOTE In the Metric training file, you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this
exercise.
Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. When you finish the
sketch in a later step, the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.
Specify subregion properties for parking area
4 On the Design Bar, click Properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the value for Material, and
click
6 In the Materials dialog, select Site - Tarmacadam for Name, and click OK.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Parking for Name, and click OK.
8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
9 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site - Tarmacadam. Although you can select
each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each, the toposurface and
its contour data remain one element.
You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region.
Open the topography schedule
10 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Topography Schedule.
TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Delete overlapping lines, and use the split and
trim tools to clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate.
23 In the upper-right parking area, use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch
the parking island shown in the following illustration. Precise dimensions are not important at
this time.
26 In the Materials dialog, select Site - Grass for Name, and click OK.
27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Island - Grass for Name, and click
OK.
28 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
29 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
WARNING Subregions cannot intersect, so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions
by 100 mm.
NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project, there is still only one
toposurface. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion, you must either
edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface.
38 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule.
Notice that the schedule has been updated.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
Modify toposurface phase assignment
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
2 Select the toposurface.
(Element Properties).
4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK.
A warning dialog is displayed, stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created
parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set
the subregion phase to match the toposurface.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase
filter.
RELATED For more information regarding phasing, see the tutorial, Using Phasing on page 761.
6 On the Design Bar, click Graded Region.
7 In the Graded Region dialog, select Copy Internal Points, and click Select and Edit.
Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the
remaining elevation points.
8 Select the topographic surface.
10 Press DELETE.
Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing,
demolished, and new.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Hidden Line.
12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following
illustration.
13 Press DELETE.
Add new elevation points
14 On the Design Bar, click Point.
15 On the Options Bar, specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm.
16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the
following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area
or walkway.
(Default 3D View).
19 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. This
accounts for the red surface that you see in this view.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
Add a building pad to the project
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Hidden Line.
3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Pad.
NOTE By default, the Pick Walls command is active. If you have an existing building model, you can
pick the exterior walls to define the building pad.
4 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar, sketch an approximate replica of the
outline shown in the following illustration. The building pad should border the concrete walkway
on the right and the upper parking area.
TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Properties of the slope arrow
specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. For additional information on using slope arrows to
modify geometry, see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.
7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
8 On the View toolbar, click
(Default 3D View).
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
Add parking components
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Parking Component.
3 In the Type Selector, select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm - 90 deg.
4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component
to the area.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the parking space.
6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of
the parking area.
NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.
7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are
horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous
space.
TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.
(Default 3D View).
13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.
(Default 3D View).
NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration, the
landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
17 Proceed to the next exercise, Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
Tag site components
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged.
3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the
loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed, and click Apply.
4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed,
click Apply, and click OK.
5 On the View menu, click Hidden Line.
6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees.
Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. In the following exercise, you use a parking schedule
to number the parking spaces.
NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value.
Add spot dimensions
7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Spot Dimension Spot Elevation.
You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. You also add a spot dimension
to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. The exact position of the dimensions is not
important.
8 On the Options Bar, verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected.
9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance:
Click up and to the left, outside of the site, to position the shoulder of the leader.
Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance.
Clear Shoulder.
Clear Leader.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
Create a parking schedule
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.
2 In the New Schedule dialog, select Parking for Category, and click OK.
3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.
4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add.
5 Under Available fields, select Type, and click Add.
6 Click the Formatting tab.
7 Under Fields, select Mark, and under Heading, enter Space.
8 Under Fields, select Type, and under Heading, enter Size, and click OK.
The parking schedule is displayed. If necessary, you can resize the column width by dragging
the column edges.
13 In the Parking Schedule, under Space, number the first three spaces consecutively.
Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Also notice that when you
place the cursor in the parking schedule, the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This
allows you to know which space you are numbering.
14 In the Parking Schedule, under Space, finish numbering the remaining spaces.
716
Sharing Projects
20
When working with large building projects, architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific
functional area. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time,
called Worksharing. In this tutorial, you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users
can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009.
You can enable Worksharing for any project. A workset is a collection of building elements, such as walls, doors, floors,
stairs, and so on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. All other team members can view this workset;
however, they cannot make changes to it. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. If you need to modify an
element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on, you can borrow that element without requiring
the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset.
Using Worksharing, team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the
network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. They can update their local
files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published.
Overview
Sharing a project for the first time
To share a project, you must first enable Worksharing. The first time you activate worksets within a project,
a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. After the project is shared, each
building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can change the workset assignment
of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element.
717
dialog. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets
required for your work.
In the lessons and exercises that follow, you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets.
You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project.
Project size
Team size
You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and
use the feature correctly. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new
worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new
team members to the project.
Project size
The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Unlike
AutoCAD Xrefs, you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Instead, you
should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with
each other. In a multi-story structure, you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements
that will only appear on one floor, such as a tenant interior. If the project floor plan is so large that you
need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets, you may want to create separate worksets for each
portion.
Team size
You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. You
should have at least one workset for each person, not including the Project Standards, Shared Levels and
Grids, and View worksets. In most projects, greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference
between team members. Experience has shown that, for a typical project, the optimum number of
worksets is approximately four for each team member.
TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use, make sure visibility defaults are set
appropriately.
Default workset visibility
After a project has been shared, a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. On this tab,
you control workset visibility on a per view basis. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset
should not appear in a view, you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. This allows
Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the
element belongs to a workset that should be displayed.
When you create a new workset, you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by
default in each view. Regardless of the default setting, you can change the visibility setting in the
Visibility/Graphics dialog. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default
unless they need to be. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the
documentation stage. As new members create worksets for their own use, the worksets they add often
do not need to be visible by default.
Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file,
make any required worksets editable, save to the central file, and then save the local file.
When working remotely, you work no differently then you would in the office. You can
modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active
workset. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if
they are not editable.
If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable
before going remote, you can make the workset Editable at Risk. In this situation, you will not
be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset
and already published those changes back to the central file. In this instance, if you know who
checked out the required workset, you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather
than waste valuable work time. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset
has already published their files to the central file, you will not only lose the changes to that
workset, you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. If the owner of the at-risk
workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset, you can save your changes
back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work.
Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost, you should use
it only when:
You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file, or
You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence.
If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file, you may want to
request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture, change the username to your
name under Settings Options, and make that workset editable. This will guarantee that
no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Worksets.rvt.
Enable Worksharing
1 On the File menu, click Worksets.
A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. It also
informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset.
2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.
The Worksets dialog displays.
Families
Project Standards
Views
4 Scroll down the list of workset names, and notice all are editable by you.
When you enable worksharing, Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project
elements and settings into the new worksets:
Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project
Standards worksets.
Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. For example, Floor Plan Level 1 view
moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1".
18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, notice that the Workset parameter is set
to Exterior Shell.
19 Click OK.
20 Select one of the interior walls.
21 On the Options Bar, click
22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Interior Layout for Workset, and
click OK.
23 Select all of the interior elements, including the interior doors, stairs, and walls.
The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up
to the upper left corner.
TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. Hold Shift down to deselect an element.
25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Interior Layout for Workset, and
click OK.
You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by
turning off the visibility of that workset.
26 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Worksets tab.
Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. This is because
you turned off Visible by default in all views when you created the workset.
28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.
29 Click OK.
The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. If any interior elements
remain, select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout.
36 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Interior Layout for Workset, and
click OK.
Create the central file
37 On the File menu, click Save As.
The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets.
Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to, but be sure not
to save the file in the training files location. This is imperative if you and another user intend
to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. If you do not have access to a network
and still want to complete that exercise, this can be accomplished by saving the central file to
your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project.
38 In the Save As dialog, enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name.
39 Click Save.
Now that you have created the central file, you must relinquish workset editability so that other
users can have access to the worksets they need.
Checking in the worksets
40 On the File menu, click Worksets.
41 In the Worksets dialog, select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A.
42 On the right side of the dialog, click Non Editable.
Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values
are set to No.
43 Click OK.
44 On the File menu, click Close.
If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial, make sure you remember
the location of this central file. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises.
In this exercise, you enabled Worksharing on a project, created new worksets to accommodate each team
member, and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. You then created the central file and
checked in all worksets. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required
worksets.
19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, notice that this element is assigned to
the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank.
Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset, you can still edit this wall.
20 Under Constraints, select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line, and click OK.
Because this element is not owned by another user, Revit Architecture borrows it for you and
applies your changes. If it was owned by another user, a message would display and you would
have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable.
The upper exterior wall should still be selected.
21 On the Options Bar, click
Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset; however, the Edited by value is
now assigned to you.
22 Click OK.
23 On the File menu, click Worksets.
In the Worksets dialog, notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset, but you are listed
as a borrower of that workset. In this case, you have borrowed the ownership of the upper
exterior wall.
24 Click OK.
35 Using the following illustration as a guide, add two door openings into the rooms you created.
All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout
workset. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new
elements, a tooltip, which matches the information in the Status Bar, displays the workset as
well as the element type.
When working in your local file, you should perform regular saves. It is recommended that you
locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours.
Saving your work
36 On the File menu, click Save to Central.
The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in.
Whenever you save, you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed
elements. By default, Borrowed Elements is selected. In this particular case, you borrowed the
upper exterior wall in order to modify it. You should check this element back into central so
that others can use it if necessary.
In addition, notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to
central. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session, it is
recommended. At the end of a work session, you should relinquish all worksets, save to central,
and save locally immediately afterward.
37 In the Save to Central dialog, select:
Borrowed Elements
User-created Worksets
38 Click OK.
If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise,
leave this file open in its current state.
In this exercise, you created your local file, checked out worksets, and borrowed an element from a workset
you did not own. You modified the building model, and published your changes back to the central file
where other team members can see them.
Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file,
a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting
the username to User 2. In the following section of this exercise, instructions are provided on how to
accomplish this.
NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2), skip the following section, and proceed to Creating a local
copy.
Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2
1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window.
2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the
desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu.
3 On the Settings menu, click Options.
4 Click the General Tab and, under Username, enter User 2, and click OK.
WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file, return to the Settings dialog,
and reset the Username to your computer login name. This is a system setting.
Creating a local copy
5 In this exercise, two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created
and saved in a previous exercise. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises
and created central files on the network, select one of those central files to be used in this
exercise.
Regardless of which central file you choose to use, one user has already created a local file. For
training purposes, consider that person to be User 1. The user who has not yet created a local
file for the chosen central file is User 2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2.
Throughout the remainder of this exercise, instructions are staggered, specifically sequenced,
and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2.
User 2: Create a local file, and check out worksets
6 On the File menu, click Open, and navigate to the location where you saved the central file
named Worksets Project-Central.rvt.
7 In the Open dialog, select the central file.
8 Click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify.
9 Click Open.
Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Only the worksets
you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition, any referenced
workset is opened but hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large
project files and increases performance while you work.
10 In the Opening Worksets dialog, select all the User-Created worksets, and click OK.
11 On the File menu, click Save As.
12 In the Save As dialog, click Options.
13 In the File Save Options dialog, verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected,
and click OK.
14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive, name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2,
and click Save.
You now have a local copy of the project. This file is for your use only.
15 On the File menu, click Worksets.
16 Select the Exterior Shell workset, and select Yes for Editable.
A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. This is because
windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.
32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows.
33 On the File menu, click Save to Central.
34 In the Save to Central dialog, select Save the Local File after Save to Central.
35 Click OK.
When you save to central, you publish your changes and load the changes other users have
made to the building model. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced
now displays.
36 Using the following illustration as a guide, delete the left window on the lower exterior wall,
and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict.
Borrowed Elements
User-created Worksets
68 Click OK.
If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element
Borrowing exercise, leave this file open in its current state.
User 1: Reload latest, and save
69 On the File menu, select Reload Latest.
70 On the File menu, select Save to Central.
71 In the Save to Central dialog, select the following, and click OK.
User-created Worksets
In this exercise, two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Each user checked out worksets,
modified the building model, and published their changes back to the central file.
In the final exercise of this tutorial, you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are
actively working on.
If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial, Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other
Users on page 734, leave this file open in its current state. This exercise also requires two users and you can
skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section, Checking out worksets.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central.rvt.
4 In the File Save Options dialog, select Make this a Central File after save, and click OK.
5 Click Save.
You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2.
User 1: Create local file
For the sake of simplicity, the user that saved the central file should be User 1. The central file should still
be open.
6 On the File menu, click Save As.
7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.
8 In the Save As dialog, click Options.
9 In the File Save Options dialog, verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected,
and click OK.
10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1, and click Save.
This is the local file for User 1.
User 2: Create local file
11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience, perform the following
steps to create a session for User 2:
Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or
by selecting it from the Start menu.
A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.
31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You can do this by dragging the
window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values.
A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1.
32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window.
After you submit the request, a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from
User 1.
At this point, you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed
element. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission.
User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element
33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your
authorization, click the File menu, and click Editing Requests.
35 Click Grant.
36 Click Close.
User 2: Check for editability grant
37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog, click Check Now.
A message informs you that your request has been granted.
38 Click OK, and notice the window is in the new location.
User 1 and 2: Save to Central, to Local, and close
39 On the File menu, select Save to Central.
40 In the Save to Central dialog, select the following, and click OK.
User-created Worksets
738
21
When working with a building model, it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These
schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options, you create multiple design
schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main
model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option), you can study and modify each design option
and present the options to the client.
In this tutorial, you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.
739
In the first exercise in this lesson, you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to
the structural design option set. In the second exercise, you create two roof system design options that work
with the structural options. In the final exercise of this lesson, you learn how to manage and organize the
design options, make your final design decision, and delete the unwanted options from the project. These
three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on
the completion of the previous exercise.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Urban_House.rvt.
4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click ROOF TERRACE.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom in Region, and zoom in on the upper half of the building
model.
6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Column.
7 In the Type Selector, select Round Column: 75mm Diameter.
8 Using the following illustration as a guide, add three columns. Arrows and the dimension lines
have been added for training purposes only. The left column should be centered at the
intersection of the notch and the wall, the second column directly across from it at the
intersection of the two walls, and the third column centered between the two.
TIP To center the middle column, either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it,
or add a dimension string between the columns, and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments.
You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column.
Constrain
Copy
Multiple
The Copy command is a two-click process. The first click specifies the reference point on the
element to be copied, and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference
point is copied to. In this case, the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x
4 grid of 12 columns. By selecting Multiple, you can continue adding new copies without
reselecting the reference point (the first click). Selecting Constrain limits the movement and
helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns.
13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch.
14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. Because it is important that you select
the same location on the notches you copy to, make sure you select a point that is easily
recognizable. In the following illustration, the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected.
TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse.
15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.
16 Zoom in around the notch construction, and click in the same location as you did for the
previous notch.
Zoom in on the upper-left column, and click at its center to set the beam start point.
Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column.
Zoom in on the upper right column, and click on the center to set the beam endpoint.
Use the following illustration as a guide. In it, two callouts with thin lines have been added to
clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam.
Constrain
Copy
Multiple
27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch, and click the center
point.
This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.
28 Zoom out, move down to the next set of columns, zoom into the left column, and select the
center of the column to add a copy.
29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.
Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof.
Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them.
41 Under Option Set, click New.
42 Select Option Set 1 and, under Option Set, click Rename.
43 In the Rename dialog, enter Roofing for New, and click OK.
44 Select the option set Roofing and, under Option, click New.
There should now be two roofing design options.
45 Under Roofing, select Option 1 (primary).
46 Under Option, click Rename, name the option Louvers, and click OK.
60 After aligning the beam, click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.
61 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
62 Select the beam and, on the Edit toolbar, click
Select Constrain
Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. The second
click represents the move end point.
64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.
65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the
beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move.
Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.
Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.
In this exercise, you set up multiple design option sets, each with multiple design options to pick from. After
setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options, you designed each of the structural options:
one for brackets, the other for beams. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. With
the second option, you created a unique in-place family as the structural system.
In the next exercise, you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options.
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, enter 11750 mm for Length, and click OK.
The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system.
Select Constrain.
You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart.
17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam; click in
the center of the intersection to specify the array start point.
18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and, when the listening dimension displays, enter
990, and press ENTER.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the louver you just placed.
23 On the Options Bar, click
24 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, enter 5475 mm for Length, and click OK.
The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system.
25 With the louver still selected, click the Edit menu, and click Array.
26 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
Select Constrain.
27 For the array starting point, click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the
beam.
28 Move the cursor vertically downward, and, when the listening dimension displays, enter 300,
and press Enter.
36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Extrusion.
37 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name, and click OK.
The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose
and is hidden in all views.
38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Click OK.
Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it, you only need to sketch a single
line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. In this case, you must create a
draped canvas sunscreen. Therefore, the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends
where they connect to the columns.
39 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
40 On the Options Bar, click
This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. The first two points define the ends
of the line, and the third point defines the arc.
41 Select the top of the left column, the top of the next column on the right, and then adjust the
dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary
dimension value immediately after you create the line.
42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns.
NOTE As you sketch the arcs, try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible, then you
can modify it through the dimension. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly
connect. You will fix this in a later step.
43 On the Design Bar, click Properties.
44 In the Element Properties dialog, specify the following:
45 Click OK.
The roof sketch must be a continuous line. You must make sure the arcs are connected where
they connect to the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool.
46 On the Tools menu, click Trim/Extend.
47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. Select the right arc, then the center arc.
The arcs should connect.
5 Right-click each of the copies, and click Rename. Rename the three copies as follows:
Secondary Option
Tertiary Option
Last Option
6 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option.
7 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. This ensures that the primaries (currently
bracket and louver) are visible.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Secondary Option.
11 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, and click OK.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Tertiary Option.
15 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option, specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option,
and click OK.
18 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Last Option.
19 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option,
and click OK.
At this point, all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed
to the client.
In this case, the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system
coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. In your design options, the beam
and the louver roofing should be selected as primary.
Project Phasing
22
In any project, you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. Phases represent distinct time periods
over the duration of a project. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific
phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. This allows
you to create phase-specific project documentation, complete with schedules. For the client, you can create a visual time
line of phase-specific 3D views.
In the lesson and exercises that follow, you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new
phases, demolish existing construction, and then add new building model elements. In the second exercise, you apply
phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase.
Using Phasing
In the lesson and exercises that follow, you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You
create new phases, demolish existing walls and doors, then add new walls and doors in a different location.
This changes room definition and total building model area.
In the second exercise, you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe
the differences in the phase-specific room schedules.
761
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Phasing.rvt.
NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing
on the goals of this tutorial, you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so, go to
the Settings menu, click Project Units, define the units, and click OK.
View current phase conditions
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
When you create a new project, two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction.
As you add new elements to the building model, they are assigned to the New Construction
phase by default. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties.
You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a
template. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template
file, then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings.
2 Click View menu View Properties.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter
and New Construction is selected for Phase.
This means that all building model elements, regardless of phase, are visible in this view. Any
new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase.
4 Click Cancel.
5 Select any of the exterior walls.
6 On the Options Bar, click
(Element Properties).
In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, notice that New Construction is selected for
Phase Created, and None is selected for Phase Demolished.
7 Click Cancel.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
After you release the mouse button, all of the building model elements, including the door tags,
are highlighted in red. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.
10 On the Options Bar, click
(Filter Selection).
13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, for Phase Created, select Existing, and click
OK.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because
of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties.
Because this is a renovation project, it requires a plan view for demolition and for new
construction. After you create the views, you modify their view properties to make each view
phase specific.
Create phase-specific views
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Rename.
16 In the Rename dialog, enter Level 1 - Existing, and click OK.
You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. This refers to the ceiling
plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Because this is a phase-specific view,
you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level.
17 Click No.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1 - Existing, and click Duplicate
View Duplicate.
19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Level 1 - Existing, and click Rename.
20 In the Rename dialog, enter Level 1 - Demo, and click OK.
You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned
demolition.
27 Click New.
A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list.
28 Under Filter Name, enter Composite Plan.
29 For Composite Plan, under New, select Overridden.
This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New,
Existing, Demolished, and Temporary.
View graphic overrides
30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab.
Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase
status. Phase status is time-dependent. You can change the cut and projection line color for a
demolished object.
(Demolish).
Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish
them. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. When you demolish the host, you demolish
all elements hosted by it.
42 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - Existing.
Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. This is because the view phase filter is set
to Show All.
Add new construction
43 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - Demo.
The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed,
new is shown in blue, and existing shows as half-tone.
Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter.
Create a new construction view
56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo.
57 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 1 - Demo, and click Duplicate View Duplicate.
58 Rename the copy to Level 1 - New.
59 Open Level 1 - New, and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New.
The renovated building model plan is displayed. This filter displays all original components
that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model
(+ New).
(Default 3D View).
61 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
All elements are displayed in this view, regardless of phase, because the phase filter is set to
Show All. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the
floor plans.
62 If necessary, spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls, which are displayed
as red.
Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags.rvt.
NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing
on the goals of this tutorial, you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so, go to
the Settings menu, click Project Units, define the units, and click OK.
Add room tags
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - Existing.
Notice that this view is the original building model.
2 Open Level 1 - Demo.
In this view, the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. They are the
same walls that display as red in the 3D view.
3 Open Level 1 - New.
In this view, you can see the new walls added to the building model. The three level 1 floor plan
views show the progression of the renovation. You can also see that the room quantities, sizes,
and locations change depending on the phase of the project.
All room boundaries are phase-specific; therefore, room tags report information based on the
phase of the view in which the rooms were added.
Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the
new phase, yet they have different room numbers.
13 Open Level 1 - Demo.
14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room Tag.
15 Using the following illustration as a guide, add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the
lower exterior wall. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.
Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view
displaying new construction. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. In this
case, both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters.
Notice that in each phase-specific schedule, room information differs based upon the phase of
the view the tags are in. In addition, notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet
than the original building model. This is because the additional interior walls in the new
construction occupy more space than the original.
20 Close the file.
In this exercise, you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. You also
opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase.
23
Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus, or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects.
In these situations, you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while
allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. This maximizes efficiency, performance,
and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger
context.
Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates:
A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area.
In this tutorial, you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.
You position the building models on the site plan, modify their visibility, and manage the links throughout the project.
In the final lesson, you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project.
771
Auto - Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of
the model.
NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. This center changes as
the footprint of your model changes.
Auto - Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit
Architecture model.
Auto - By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates, this
option will place the link at a predefined location.
RELATED See the lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789.
Manual - Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.
NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system; however, this system is not exposed to
the user.
Manual - Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. This option is grayed out.
Manual - Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.
This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Because training files are used in multiple
tutorials and are normally installed as read-only, you need to copy the three training files to a different
directory and make them writable. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer, you can do
so. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site, c_Townhouse,
c_Condo_Complex. Otherwise, use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.
Save training files to different folder
1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking.
2 On the File menu, click Open.
3 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Site.rvt.
NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder.
4 On the File menu, click Save As, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step,
and save the file there.
5 On the File menu, click Close.
6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files:
c_Townhouse
c_Condo_Complex
7 Open the Model Linking folder, select the three files, right-click, and click Properties.
8 Clear Read-only, and click OK.
All three files now reside, with write permission, in the Model Linking folder that you created.
Link condo complex into site project
9 On the File menu, click Open.
Select c_Site.
Click Open.
NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. Because model
linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units, you do not need to change the
project units to metric. If you wish to do so, you can go to the Settings menu, click Project Units, and
make your changes.
10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model
sites.
13 Click Open.
The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model.
(Move).
The Move command requires two clicks. The first click specifies the move start point. The second
click specifies the move endpoint.
16 For the move start point, click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model.
17 For the move endpoint, click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.
After you specify the location to move to, the linked file displays within the confines of the
blue detail lines.
21 Click Open.
(Rotate).
To rotate an object, you first specify the rotation start point, and then click to specify the end
of the rotation. In this case, the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.
24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and, when the vertical line displays, click to specify
the rotation start point.
25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise, and click to specify the end of the rotation.
(Move).
This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left
corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint
of the townhouse.
27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.
28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.
(Copy).
The Copy command works much like the Move command. The first click specifies the start
point, and the second click specifies the copy-to point.
30 For the starting point, select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.
31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point.
A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project.
32 On the Edit menu, click Rotate, and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.
NOTE After you rotate the townhouse, if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines, use
the Move command to make any adjustments.
33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left.
34 On the Options Bar, click
35 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity data, for Name, enter Townhouse A, and click
OK.
36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B.
37 On the View toolbar, click
(Default 3D View).
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files.
If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
Modify the vertical position of the townhouses
1 On the View toolbar, click
(SteeringWheels).
2 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the
following illustration.
NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels, click Try Me for the Full Nav Large
Wheel.
Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface.
This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top
of the site surface.
3 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
In the steps that follow, you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this
project. When using the Align command, you first select the plane you want to align to, and
then select the plane that you want to align. In this case, you align the Ground Floor level to
Level 1 of the site plan.
7 On the Tools toolbar, click
(Align).
8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project, move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the
Townhouse project, and click to select it.
TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project, press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays
in the status bar, and click to select the line. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level
marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. If you experience difficulty
finding the Level1 : Reference, you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. To do this,
click View menu Visibility/Graphics. Click the Revit Links tab, clear Visibility for the
c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click OK. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you
have completed this task.
Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option
displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would
over-constrain the model.
9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North.
10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the
remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.
(Default 3D View).
(SteeringWheels).
14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the
following illustration.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and
in this view.
In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see,
each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those
differences within the host project.
In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.
NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the
remaining elevation views.
12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for
c_Condo_Complex.rvt.
Apply halftone
13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab.
16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt.
Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model.
17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK.
Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply
halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom
option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display
in halftone.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files.
If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
Unload and reload links
1 On the File menu, click Manage Links.
2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab.
Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply
information regarding the links.
NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared
coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked
file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use
the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about
this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models.
3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute.
The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an
absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new
directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked
file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link
in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked
file is on a network where multiple users need access to it.
4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt.
The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active.
5 Click Unload.
NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components
that must be opened and drawn.
6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes.
The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear.
7 Click OK.
Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.
TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a
different location.
Linking building models with Worksharing enabled
In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases,
you should consider the following:
Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can
specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click
the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing
the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn.
Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked
files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files.
To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then
specify the additional worksets you need opened.
Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled
building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in
each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status
for all other linked files.
Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you
must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link
symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and
the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned
to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same
workset.
TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded
when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to
opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload.
NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed
by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser.
Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.
10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name
the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it
is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects.
In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the
next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects.
If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.
coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the
site data.
When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends
the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host
project.
You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the
coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that
has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 772, and the
resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project,
open it before continuing.
Training File
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Publish coordinates
1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.
4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK.
On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is
waiting for you to select another link.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and
in this view.
You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a
coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value
is Not Shared.
4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location.
Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the
linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you
need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation.
5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location.
In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish
coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is
only necessary to reconcile coordinates once.
14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to.
Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an
instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left
townhouse resides at that location.
15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as.
Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine
its location.
16 Click Change.
17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK.
18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK.
19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK.
20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B.
Save locations
21 On the File menu, click Manage Links.
22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.
23 Click Save Locations.
24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK.
When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly
save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there.
NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you
are prompted to save the locations to the linked files.
25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project
is no longer selected.
26 Click OK.
27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When
you release the mouse button, a warning displays.
You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific
location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel
the action.
28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B.
You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it.
When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that
the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared
coordinates.
Relocate a project
29 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom to Fit.
30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation Relocate this Project.
This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies
the move endpoint.
31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.
32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.
Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked
projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.
33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position.
34 On the File menu, click Save.
35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK.
36 On the File menu, click Close.
NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one
of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture.
In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to
relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Link a project
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor.
This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within
that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file.
2 On the File menu, click Import/Link Revit.
3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Select c_Condo_Complex.
Click Open.
Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the
host project.
4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.
The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building
model. The current active location is Lot A.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and
in this view.
In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file
into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes.
In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Comments
Cost
8 Click OK.
In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project, you can sort the schedule
data and display a single table entry per door type.
Sort schedule data
9 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, right-click Door Schedule, and click
Properties.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.
11 In the Schedule Properties dialog, select Family and Type for Sort by.
12 Select Grand totals, clear Itemize every instance, and then click OK twice.
Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type, the schedule lists the total count
for each door type, and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings.
13 On the File menu, click Save.
14 On the File menu, click Close.
In this exercise, you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You also
sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.
You have completed this tutorial.
800
Customizing Project
Settings and Templates
801
802
24
In this tutorial, you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. In the first lesson, you
modify the system environment, which is independent of the project settings. In the second lesson, you modify project
settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. Finally, you create an office
template, and set it as your default template.
803
15 Click OK.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall.
Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.
Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the status bar displays information about the
highlighted element.
21 Click File menu Close.
22 When prompted to save changes, click No.
23 Click File menu Open.
24 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Settings.rvt.
Notice that the system settings apply to this project.
25 Click Settings menu Options.
26 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab, and make the following changes:
Under Notifications, select your preferred Save reminder interval. For Tooltip assistance,
select Normal.
Under Username, enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Your login name
displays by default.
Under Journal File Cleanup, select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete
journals older than (days).
Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify.
Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions.
These files are used in the software support process. Journals can be run to detect a problem
or recreate lost steps or files. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture
session.
28 Click OK.
Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display
when you place the cursor over any building component.
29 Click File menu Close. If prompted, do not save the changes.
30 Proceed to the next exercise, Specifying File Locations on page 805.
library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in
the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.
When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit Architecture file, you can click on the library
folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries
display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.
(Add Value).
12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library, and change the name to My Library.
13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library, and click the icon
side of the field.
14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit
Architecture projects, templates, or families, and click Open.
TIP You may want to create a new folder first, and select it as the library path.
The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open, Save, Load, and Import
dialogs. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.
15 Under Library Name, click My Library.
16 Click
(Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list, and click OK twice.
25 Click OK.
Specify rendering settings
26 Click the Rendering tab.
27 Under Render Appearance Library Location, view the current path.
This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. This path is determined during
installation. If you want to relocate this path, specify the new location here.
Under Additional Render Appearance Paths, you can specify the locations of other files used to
define render appearances, such as bump maps, custom color files, and decal image files.
28 Click OK.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Specifying Spelling Options on page 807.
6 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the
value 1000 ; and enter 500 ;.
7 Under Object Snaps, notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.
You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. For example, if you
want to snap an object to a wall midpoint, enter SM, and only midpoint snaps are recognized
until you commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint, snapping reverts
to the system default settings.
8 In the Snaps dialog, click OK.
9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
10 On the Options Bar, clear Chain.
11 Click in the center of the drawing area, and move the cursor to the right.
Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If it does not, zoom out
until it does so.
A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. This
dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.
TIP To zoom while sketching, use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel
button, you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. While sketching, you
can also use the zoom shortcut keys, such as ZO to zoom out.
12 While sketching a generic straight wall, zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment
shifts to 500 mm.
This is the increment that you added previously.
Sketch without snapping
13 While sketching the wall, enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.
Notice that when snapping is turned off completely, the listening dimension reflects the exact
length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.
14 Click to set the wall endpoint.
15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall, and move the cursor to the right. Do not set
the wall end point.
Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping, the
command is only active for one click of the mouse.
Use snapping shortcut keys
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and click Wall.
17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.
Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. If you move the cursor along the
wall, it will snap to the endpoints, the midpoint, and the wall edges.
18 Enter SM.
This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.
19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.
This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. After you create a new fieldstone material and
apply it to the exterior wall face, you render a region to observe the changes.
Training File
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Settings.rvt.
Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. This list includes all materials available
for use on model elements. When a model element is loaded into a project, all materials that
are part of that family are also loaded into the project.
2 Scroll down the materials list, and select Masonry - Stone.
Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. However, this material provides a
starting point for the new material, Masonry - Fieldstone.
3 Click
(Duplicate).
This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.
4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, enter Masonry - Fieldstone, and click OK.
You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. Notice
that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. In the steps
that follow, you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.
Change the render appearance
5 Click the Render Appearance tab.
The properties describe the color, scale, and texture of the material. These details will display
in rendered images.
6 Click Replace.
The Render Appearance Library is a local, read-only library for render appearances. When you
change properties of a render appearance, the modified render appearance is stored as part of
the project file. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library.
7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, for Class, select Stone.
The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class.
8 Select Riverstone Blue, and click OK.
In the Materials dialog, the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected
stone.
9 Click Apply.
10 Click the Graphics tab.
Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. In the next exercise, you create a fieldstone pattern
and apply it to the Masonry - Fieldstone material.
11 Click OK.
Apply the new material
12 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) Floor Plans, and double-click 02 Entry Level.
13 Select the lower exterior wall, and click
(Element Properties).
(Default 3D View).
26 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and verify that Shading with Edges is
selected.
Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick, and there is no stone pattern applied in this
view. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined.
In the following exercise, Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815, you create a fieldstone
pattern and apply it to this material.
27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Rendering Dialog.
TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click
Rendering.
28 In the Rendering dialog, select Region.
29 In the 3D view, select the render region (a red rectangle), and drag its blue grips to adjust the
render region around the building.
30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area.
31 In the Rendering dialog, under Quality, for Setting, select Low or Medium.
Higher quality renderings require more time to generate.
32 In the Rendering dialog, click Render.
The rendering process begins. When finished, the rendered image displays fieldstone walls.
TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail, in the Rendering dialog, click Show the model.
Zoom into the model, and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area.
Then click Render again.
33 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model, and clear Region.
34 Close the Rendering dialog.
35 Click File menu Save As.
36 Navigate to a folder of your preference, and save the file as m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
37 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815.
8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog, click Training Files, and open
Common\Fieldstone_Model.pat.
9 Under Custom, select fldstn, and for Import scale, enter .56.
10 For Name, enter Fieldstone, and click OK.
The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog.
11 Click OK.
Apply the fieldstone pattern
12 Select the west exterior wall with windows.
(Element Properties).
In the Materials dialog, notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry - Fieldstone
material.
18 Under Surface Pattern, click
(Default 3D View).
TIP If the pattern does not display, adjust your zoom settings as needed.
26 Click File menu Save.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Object Styles on page 817.
2 On the keyboard, use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region), and drag a rectangle around the
3 windows facing you.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Shading with Edges.
4 Select one of the rectangular windows.
5 On the Options Bar, click
(Element Properties).
8 In the Materials dialog, click By Category (located under the materials list).
This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting.
9 Click OK twice.
10 Select the arched window.
11 On the Options Bar, click
(Element Properties).
.
(Duplicate).
21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Trim - red paint, and click OK.
22 Click the Render Appearance tab.
23 Click Replace.
24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, for Class, select Paint.
25 In the search field, type red.
The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names, descriptions,
or keywords include the word red.
(Default 3D view).
6 Click OK twice.
Now that you have created a line pattern, you can apply it using either of the following methods:
7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Hidden Line.
8 Click Settings menu Object Styles.
9 In the Object Styles dialog, under Category, select Roofs.
10 For Line Color, select Red.
11 For Line Pattern, select Roof Line.
12 Click OK.
The line style is applied to the roof in the view.
NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. The pattern is not applied in a perspective
or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. Plans, sections, elevations, and orthogonal 3D
views show line color and pattern.
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 03 Roof.
25 Click OK twice.
31 Click OK.
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
33 In the Type Selector, select Zoning Setback.
34 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
Click
(Draw).
Click
(Line).
NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view, use the Detail Lines command on the
Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created, as if they
are placed on an overlay of the view.
(Default 3D View).
43 Click OK.
44 On the View toolbar, click
(Default 3D View).
Modifying Annotations
In this exercise, you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project
settings. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number
rather than the window type.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the
end of that exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
Create a new dimension style
1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt, is open with the 02
Entry Level floor plan active.
2 Click Settings menu Annotations Dimensions Linear.
3 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
4 Enter the name Linear - Imperial and click OK.
5 Under Text, for Units Format, click the default value.
6 In the Format dialog:
7 Click OK twice.
You have created a new dimension style.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.
9 In the Type Selector, select Linear - Imperial, and place a dimension on the floor plan.
To place a dimension, click one wall, click another wall, and then click outside the second wall.
10 On the Standard toolbar, click
(Undo).
Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged, and that the tags display the window type
rather than the window instance number.
13 Select a tagged window in the west wall.
(Element Properties).
15 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.
The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. In the steps that follow,
you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark.
16 Click Cancel.
17 Click Settings menu Annotations Loaded Tags.
18 In the Tags dialog, under Category, scroll down to Windows.
Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.
19 Click Load.
20 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag - Number.rfa.
In the preview image, notice that the label displays 1i. This indicates this tag is designed to
display the window instance value rather than the type value.
21 In the Tags dialog, scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag - Number is now the
assigned tag.
This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.
22 Under Loaded Tags, click M_Window Tag - Number, and select the drop-down arrow that
displays.
Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Leave
M_Window Tag - Number as the assigned tag.
23 Click OK.
24 While pressing CTRL, select the 3 window tags. Then press Delete.
25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag By Category.
26 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
27 On the west wall, click the bottom window.
A window instance tag displays on the selected window.
Under Category, notice Window Tags appears twice. Each Window Tag category has a different
loaded tag: one displays the type value, the other displays the instance value.
29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag, M_Window Tag - Number.
30 Under Leader, verify that Create is clear, and click OK.
The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Both window tag types can
coexist within the same view.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps, you can have multiple views: one displaying
window type tags and the other displaying window instance values.
(Default 3D View).
Click OK.
In this project, temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window
openings. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls.
Specify detail levels
10 Click Settings menu Detail Level.
When you create a new view and specify its view scale, the detail level is specified automatically
according to the arrangement in the table.
TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View
Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.
In this table, you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level
to another. You do not select a view scale to move it. The view scale moves either from the
bottom or the top of the column based on the direction.
11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium, click
Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. Any new view created using this
scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium.
12 Click OK.
13 Click File menu Save.
14 Click File menu Close.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Project_Browser.rvt.
Completed Project-Structure
Completed Project
19 Click OK.
Materials
Fill patterns
Object styles
Annotations
Project units
Temporary dimensions
Detail levels
In addition to the list above, there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications
that can be saved in a template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise.
During this exercise, specific modifications are not dictated. You are merely pointed to each area where you
can adapt the template to your needs. For more details on modifying these settings, see the previous lesson,
Modifying System Settings on page 803, or refer to the online help.
Create and modify materials
1 Click Settings menu Materials.
2 Scroll down the materials list.
Observe the materials that are already defined. You may want to rename or modify some of the
existing materials. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry, create and
modify them as needed.
TIP For more information about creating new materials, see Modifying Project Settings on page 811,
or refer to the online help.
When you create or modify a material, you can specify its appearance in rendered images,
including color, texture, transparency, and similar attributes. You do this by defining the render
appearance.
3 Click the Render Appearance tab.
You can assign a different render appearance to a material, see a preview of the rendered material,
and change render appearance properties.
4 Click Replace.
If you change render appearance properties, the changes are saved as part of the project template,
not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. Any related files (such as image files or bump
maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. For more
information, see Specifying File Locations on page 805.
5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs.
Create and modify fill patterns
6 Click Settings menu Fill Patterns.
7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns.
Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Model patterns represent actual element
appearance on a building. You can align, rotate, and move model patterns. You can also
dimension to model pattern lines.
8 Create new fill patterns as needed, or modify existing patterns.
See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns.
9 Click OK when finished.
Specify object styles
10 Click Settings menu Object Styles.
In the Object Styles dialog, you can set line weights, line colors, line patterns, and materials for
model objects, annotation objects, and imported objects.
TIP When the material of an object is set to by category, it adopts the material assigned to its object
styles category.
11 Click the Model Objects tab, and scroll through the list of categories.
12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed.
13 If necessary, create new subcategories.
14 Click the Annotation Objects tab.
The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and
windows) in orthographic views. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. You
can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales.
The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective
views.
The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols, such as
section lines and dimension lines. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale.
40 Click OK.
Modify dimension styles
41 Click Settings menu Annotations Dimensions Linear.
Linear, angular, and radial dimensions are modified separately.
42 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.
43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary.
44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style.
45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style, click Duplicate, name the style, and specify
the properties.
46 Click OK.
47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions.
Associated Tutorial
Considerations
Project Parameters
Settings Menu
Command
Associated Tutorial
Considerations
Phases
View Templates
Site Settings
75 Proceed to the next exercise, Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837.
Use the instructions in the table below to load, create, or modify a door.
Goal:
Steps:
In the Element Properties dialog, click Load. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Select it, and click Open.
4 Click OK.
5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.
You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not
available on this tab.
You can also load families and groups from the File menu.
6 Click File menu Load from Library.
Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Loading from the library
is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load.
7 Press ESC twice to return to the template.
Use the Project Browser to modify families
8 In the Project Browser, expand Families.
Notice that each family category is listed. You can use the Project Browser to modify family
types.
(Element Properties).
12 Click Preview.
This title block is currently part of the template. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right
corner. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title
block.
To load a title block, click Load.
13 Click OK.
You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. To do so,
right-click the component, and click Delete.
14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps, load, create, or modify any component
families or groups as necessary.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839.
settings of categories and subcategories. In this exercise, you will first modify view templates, and then create
new views that will automatically use those templates.
Create and modify view templates
1 Click Settings menu View Templates.
2 Under Names, select Architectural Plan.
These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. At any time,
you can apply a view template to any view. These values represent the starting point for each
plan view.
By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs, you reduce rework and
increase consistency across projects.
3 Specify each value according to your needs. Keep in mind that these settings are the default
settings for this view type.
4 If necessary, rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications.
5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list.
6 Click OK.
Apply view templates
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
8 Click View menu Apply View Template.
Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. The view properties of the target view
are instantly reset to match those of the template.
After applying the template, the view is not linked to the template in any way. Subsequent
modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view
template.
There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. In addition,
there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply.
9 Select the Architectural Plan template.
10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type.
Every time a new plan view is created, it will use this view template to set the initial view
properties.
11 Click Apply, and click OK.
12 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.
13 Click View menu Apply View Template.
14 Select the Architectural Plan template, click Apply, and click OK.
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
16 Click View menu Apply View Template.
17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template, select Site Plan, click Apply, and then click
OK.
NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. This would result in the Site
Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views.
18 If you modified any other view templates, open the view from the Project Browser, and apply
the appropriate template.
Create and modify views
19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South.
Notice the level names. Blue level heads have associated plan views. Black level heads have no
associated views.
20 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, review the existing floor plans.
21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and, in the shortcut menu, notice
that you have the option to rename, duplicate, or delete this view.
22 In the Project Browser, review the floor plans, ceiling plans, and elevations. Rename, duplicate,
or delete them as needed.
23 To add more levels to the template, on the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Level.
Make sure you are still in the South elevation view.
24 On the Options Bar, select Make Plan View.
25 Add the new level within the elevation view.
The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view
properties.
26 Rename and reposition the level as needed.
27 Create additional levels as needed.
Create 3D views
28 To add 3D views to the template, on the View toolbar, click
(Default 3D View).
To orient the 3D view to another view, right-click the ViewCube, click Orient to View, and
select the desired view.
To orient the 3D view to a direction, right-click the ViewCube, click Orient to a Direction,
and select the desired direction.
33 To save the re-oriented view, right-click the ViewCube, and click Save View. If prompted, enter
a view name.
The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) 3D Views.
Create and modify schedules
34 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.
You can add schedules to a template. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you
use most often, and modify their properties accordingly. This can save significant time and
ensure that office standards are maintained.
35 If you want to add schedules to your template, select the category type, and click OK.
36 In the Schedule Properties dialog, make the following modifications as needed:
37 Click OK.
38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.
Add sheets to the template
39 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Sheet.
You are prompted to select a title block. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into
the template, select one, and click OK.
TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. To do so, select the default title
block, and click OK. After the sheet is created, select the title block and delete it. You can still add
views to the sheet. To later add a title block to a sheet, click View menu New Place Titleblock.
40 To add views to the sheet, on the View tab of the Design Bar, click Add View. Select a view, and
click Add View to Sheet.
TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet.
41 To rename or renumber the sheet, in the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all). Right-click the
sheet name, and click Rename.
42 Create new sheets as needed.
Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet.
43 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842.
TIP In the Export Layers dialog, Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Layer
name corresponds to level name for MicroStation.
2 For each category, specify the following:
3 If you modified the settings in this dialog, click Save As, name the file, and click Save.
Modify export layers for DGN
4 Click File menu Import/Export Settings Export Layers DGN.
5 For each category, specify the following:
6 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
Modify import line weights
7 Click File menu Import/Export Settings Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.
You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture
line weight. You can save these mappings to a text file, and they become the set mappings for
the project. These settings are retained within the project template; therefore, you do not need
to worry about where the text file is saved.
8 In the dialog, match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight, for
example, Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1, Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2,
and so on. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired.
9 Click Save As, name the file, and click Save.
When you import a DWG or DXF file, each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on
the pen number/line weight settings you created.
10 Proceed to the next exercise, Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843.
This exercise does not provide detailed instructions, because each office has a unique set of needs. If you
are unfamiliar with shared parameters, project parameters, and the creation of multi-category tags and
schedules, see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
on page 226. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters, you can skip this exercise
and move onto the last exercise of this lesson, Creating Named Print Settings on page 845.
Set up shared parameters
1 Click File menu Shared Parameters.
NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. If a file already exists, you can
browse to that file and modify it as needed.
2 Click Create.
3 Name and save the file.
If this template will be used by multiple team members, you may want to save the file to a
network location.
Create parameter groups
4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New.
5 Enter the group name, and click OK.
6 Create as many groups as needed.
For each parameter group, you can create a list of parameters.
Create shared parameters
7 Under Parameter group, select a group to add parameters to.
8 Under Parameters, click New.
9 Name the parameter, and specify its discipline and type.
10 Click OK.
11 For each parameter group, add required parameters.
12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters.
Set up project parameters
13 Click Settings menu Project Parameters.
14 Click Add.
15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Project parameter.
16 Under Parameter Data, for Name, enter a parameter name.
17 Under Discipline, select a parameter discipline type.
18 Under Type of Parameter, select a parameter value type.
19 Under Group parameter under, select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the
Element Properties dialog.
20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type.
21 Under Categories, select the element categories to which this parameter applies.
22 Click OK.
23 Add project parameters as needed.
24 To add a shared project parameter, click Add, and select Shared Parameter.
25 Click Select, and choose a shared parameter.
26 Click OK.
27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter,
indicate the group to which the parameter belongs, and assign the categories to which this
parameter applies.
28 Click OK.
29 Add shared project parameters as needed. Click OK.
Create and load multi-category tags
30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor.
For information on creating multi-category tags, see the tutorial referenced in the introduction
of this exercise, or refer to the online help.
After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor, you can load them into the
template.
31 Click File menu Load from Library Load Family.
32 Navigate to the directory, select the tag, and click Open.
The tag is now part of the template.
Create multi-category schedules
33 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities.
34 For Category, select Multi-Category.
35 For Name, enter a name for the schedule, and click OK.
36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise.
Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of
available fields.
37 When you have completed the schedule, click OK.
38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed.
39 Proceed to the final exercise, Creating Named Print Settings on page 845.
7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer, modify the printer settings, click Save as,
enter a new name for the printer, and click OK. Create additional settings as needed.
8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer.
9 In the Print dialog, select a different printer, click Setup, and create new settings for this printer.
10 Repeat these steps as needed.
TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer.
11 Click Close when finished.
Your template is complete. The only remaining task is to save it.
Save the template
12 Click File menu Save.
13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template.
If you need to share this file with others, save it in a network location.
14 Under Save as type, select Template Files (*.rte).
15 Name the template, and click Save.
16 Click File menu Close.
Use the template
17 Click File menu New Project.
18 Click Browse, and navigate to the location where you saved the template.
19 Select the template, and click Open.
20 Click OK.
The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project.
You can also set this template as your default template.
Set the template as your default template file
21 Click Settings menu Options.
22 Click the File Locations tab.
23 For Default template file, click Browse.
24 Navigate to the template location, select it, and click Open.
25 Click OK.
TIP There are other ways you can create a template. If you have a project, you can delete the model
geometry and save the empty project as a template file. This can provide a good starting point for a
template. In addition, you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one
project to another.
In this lesson, you modified settings, loaded components, and saved them to a template. By investing the
time to individualize your template, you ensure that office standards are maintained. In addition, you
significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.